all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | labels |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
114-5744-010 EN Part1 | Users Manual | 4.87 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
114-5744-010 EN Part2 | Users Manual | 3.93 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
114-5745-010 EN Part1 | Users Manual | 4.97 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
114-5745-010 EN Part2 | Users Manual | 675.32 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
114-5748-010 EN-FR Part1 | Users Manual | 4.94 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
114-5748-010 EN-FR Part2 | Users Manual | 4.94 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
114-5748-010 EN-FR Part3 | Users Manual | 4.81 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
IMG 2188 | Internal Photos | 283.64 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
IMG 2191 | External Photos | 177.91 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
HVIN 003-0458-4 | ID Label/Location Info | 449.96 KiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
HVIN 003-0458-5 | ID Label/Location Info | 449.96 KiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 | 003-0458-4 | Schematics | July 12 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | 003-0458-5 | Schematics | July 12 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | AC Phoenix Block diagram | Block Diagram | July 12 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | AC Phoenix Theory of operation | Operational Description | July 12 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | BOM 003-0458-4 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | July 12 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 | BOM 003-0458-5 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | July 12 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 |
|
Confidentiality Letter Short Term FCC | Cover Letter(s) | 87.23 KiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
Cover Letter Requesting Confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 84.54 KiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
Declaration Letter model similarity | Cover Letter(s) | 96.67 KiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780 test setup photos part 1 | Test Setup Photos | 550.93 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780 test setup photos part 2 | Test Setup Photos | 542.50 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780-01 Realtek WiFi | Test Report | 3.78 MiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780-02 Realtek BLE | Test Report | 4.18 MiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780-05 Security BLE | Test Report | 3.61 MiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780-06 MultiTx | Test Report | 4.78 MiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780-07 RF Exposure | Test Report | 743.04 KiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
Phoenix AC Chamberlain Test Recommendatin 5-23-2022 (002) Data Map | Cover Letter(s) | 51.16 KiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | July 12 2022 | ||||||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780-03 900MHz TxRx | Test Report | 4.93 MiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 |
|
ETR2201780-03 900MHz TxRx Part2 | Test Report | 2.45 MiB | July 12 2022 | |||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | July 12 2022 |
1 2 | 114-5744-010 EN Part1 | Users Manual | 4.87 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
Easy step-by-step interactive 3D instructions for this product can be found in Download the free myQ App Monitor and control your garage from anywhere and get real-time alerts with peace of mind. Available on most iOS and Android Devices Download the free BILT App before assembly Installation Manual Inside www.chamberlain.com Installation Manual Chain Drive Garage Door Opener Models C2212T C2405 C2102 C2202 D2101 FOR RESIDENTIAL USE ONLY PRE PROGRAMMED REMOTE CONTROL INCLUDED To register your garage door opener to receive updates and offers from Chamberlain, visit chamberlain.registria.com or use the icon below:
1. Take a photo of the camera icon including the points (
Send it in by texting the photo to 71403 (US).
). 2. Please read this manual and the enclosed safety materials carefully!
Fasten the manual near the garage door after installation. The door WILL NOT CLOSE unless the Protector System is connected and properly aligned. Periodic checks of the garage door opener are required to ensure safe operation. The model number label is located on the back panel of your garage door opener. This garage door opener is compatible with myQ and Security+ 2.0 accessories. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. Download the myQ App Available on most iOS and Android Devices Available on most iOS and Android Devices Contents Preparation 5 Assembly 9 Installation 14 Install the Door Control . 24 Install the Protector System . 27 Connect Power . 31 Adjustments 33 Battery Backup 36 myQ App Control 37 Connect With Your Smartphone . 37 Operation 38 Using your Garage Door Opener . 38 Using your Door Control . 39 Remote Control and Keyless Entry . 40 Home Link . 40 Erase the Memory . 41 To Open the Door Manually . 41 Maintenance 42 Troubleshooting 43 Warranty 45 Automatic Garage Door Opener Safety & Maintenance Guide 46 Repair Parts 48 Rail Assembly Parts . 48 Installation Parts . 48 Model C2212T . 49 Model C2102 . 50 Model C2405 . 51 Model C2202 . 52 Model D2101 . 53 4 Safety Symbol and Signal Word Review This garage door opener has been designed and tested to offer safe service provided it is installed, operated, maintained and tested in strict accordance with the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Mechanical Electrical When you see these Safety Symbols and Signal Words on the following pages, they will alert you to the possibilityof serious injury or death if you do not comply with the warnings that accompany them. The hazardmay come from something mechanical or from electric shock. Read the warnings carefully. When you see this Signal Word on the following pages, it will alert you to the possibility of damage to your garage door and/or the garage door opener if you do not comply with the cautionary statements that accompany it. Read them carefully. WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer or birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Unattended Operation The Timer-to-Close (TTC) feature, the myQ App, and myQ Garage Door and Gate Monitor are examples of unattended close and are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. Any device or feature that allows the door to close without being in the line of sight of the door is considered unattended close. The Timer-to-Close (TTC) feature, the myQApp, and any other myQ devices are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. The images throughout this manual are for reference only and your product may look different. Before You Connect with Your Smartphone*
Monitor and control your garage door from anywhere using the myQ App. You will need a router with Wi-Fi and a smartphone or other mobile device. Make sure your mobile device is connected to your Wi-Fi network. Hold your mobile device in the place where your garage door opener will be installed and check the Wi-Fi signal strength. Check Signal Strength. If you see:
Wi-Fi signal is strong. Youre all set!
Install your new garage door opener. Wi-Fi signal is weak. The garage door opener will likely connect to your Wi-Fi network. If not, try one of the options below. No Wi-Fi signal. Try one of the following:
Move your router closer to the garage door opener to minimize interference from walls and other objects Buy a Wi-Fi range extender Visit support.chamberlaingroup.com for more details. See myQ App Control page 37 to connect your garage door opener to your Wi-Fi network.
*Smartphone control is not available on models C2102 and D2101. Preparation Preparation Check the Door To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS call a trained door systems technician if garage door binds, sticks, or is out of balance. An unbalanced garage door may NOT reverse when required. NEVER try to loosen, move or adjust garage door, door springs, cables, pulleys, brackets or their hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension. Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to garage door BEFORE installation and operating garage door opener to avoid entanglement. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. To prevent damage to garage door and opener:
ALWAYS disable locks BEFORE installing and operating the opener. ONLY operate garage door opener at 120V, 60 Hz to avoid malfunction and damage. Before you begin:
1. Disable locks and remove any ropes connected to the garage door. 2. Lift the door half way up. Release the door. If balanced, it should stay in place, supported entirely by its springs. Raise and lower the door to check for binding or sticking. If your door binds, sticks, or is out of balance, call a trained door systems technician. Check the seal on the bottom of the door. Any gap between the floor and the bottom of the door must not exceed 1/4 (6 mm). Otherwise, the safety reversal system may not work properly. The opener should be installed above the center of the door. If there is a torsion spring or center bearing plate in the way of the header bracket, it may be installed within 4 feet
(1.2m) to the left or right of the door center. See page 13. 3. 4. 5. Torsion Spring Extension Spring 5 Preparation Tools Needed Additional Items You May Need:
Survey your garage are a to see if you will need any of the following items:
(2)2X4 Pieces of wood : May be used to fasten the header bracket to the structural supports. Also used to position the garage door opener during installation and for testing the safety reversing sensors. Support bracket and fastening hardware: Must be used if you have a finished ceiling in your garage. Support brackets Hanging brackets Hardware x2 (each) 5/32 3/16 5/16 Extension brackets (Model 041A5281-1) or wood blocks: Depending upon garage construction, extension brackets or wood blocks may be needed to install the safety reversing sensor. Lag screws x4 Lag screws x12 1/2 1/4 7/16 9/16 7/16 Extension Brackets 041A5281-1 Wood Blocks Fastening hardware: Alternate floor mounting of the safety reversing sensor will require hardware not provided. Door reinforcement: Required if you have alight weight steel, aluminum, fiber glass or glass panel door. Rail extension kit: Required if your garage door is more than 7 feet (2.13 m) high. 6 Preparation Carton Inventory Save the carton and packing material until the installation and adjustment is complete. Instructions for the accessories will be attached to the accessory and are not included in this manual. The images throughout this manual are for reference only and your product may look different. 1. Header bracket 2. Pulley 3. Door bracket 4. Curved door arm 5. Straight door arm
(Packaged inside front rail section) 6. Trolley 7. Emergency release rope and handle 8. Rail (1 front and 4 center sections) 9. Garage door opener (motor unit) 10. Chain spreader with screws - Model C2405 11. 12. Chain and cable or chain (D2101 only) 13. The Protector System U bracket Safety reversing sensors with 2 conductor white and white/black wire attached: sending sensor (1), receiving sensor (1), and safety sensor brackets (2) 14. Battery Backup - Model C2212T 15. Remote control 16 Wireless keypad - Model C2405 17. Push Button Door Control - Models C2202, C2212T, C2102, C2202, D2101 Multi-Function Control Panel - Model C2405 18. White and red/white wire 19. 20. Sprocket cover - Model C2212T Installation manual and all warning labels See Hardware page 6. Go to chamberlain.com for replacement or additional accessories:
3-button remote control model 953EV-P2 Wireless keypad model 940EV-P2 7 8 x1 2 12 5 8 x4 1 11 3 6 20 9 10 7 4 13 x1 14 13 x1 13 17 16 18 19 15 Preparation Hardware ASSEMBLY Bolt 1/4-20x1-3/4 Bolt INSTALLATION DOOR CONTROL Lag Screw 5/16-9x1-5/8 (4) Self-Threading Screw 1/4-14x5/8 (2) MODELS C2405 Threaded Shaft Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/2 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Drywall Anchors (2) Screw 6-32x1 (2) Screw 6ABx1 (2) Lock Nut 1/4-20 Master Link (2) Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 (4) Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Model C2212T Hex Screw 10-24 (2) Wing Nut (2) Nut 3/8 Lock Washer 3/8 Nut 5/16-18 (6) Lock Washer 5/16-18 (5) Ring Fastener (3) Drywall Anchors (2) Screw 6ABx1-
1/2 (2) Insulated Staples
(Not Shown) 8 Assembly STEP1 Assemble the Rail and Install the Trolley To prevent INJURY from pinching, keep hands and fingers away from the joints while assembling the rail. Slide to stops on top and sides of U bracket To avoid installation difficulties, do not run the garage door opener until instructed to do so. The front rail has a cut out window at the door end. The rail tab MUST be on top of the rail when assem-
bled. 1. Remove the straight door arm and hanging bracket packaged inside the front rail and set a side for Installation Step 5 and 9. NOTE: To prevent INJURY while unpacking the rail carefully remove the straight door arm stored within the rail section. 2. Align the rail sections on a flat surface as shown and slide the tapered ends into the larger ones. Tabs along the side will lock into place. 3. Place the motor unit on packing material to protect the cover, and rest the back end of the rail on top. For convenience, put a support under the front end of the rail. 4. As a temporary stop, insert a screwdriver into the hole in the second rail section from the motor unit, as shown. 5. Check to be sure there are 4 plastic wear pads inside the inner trolley. If they became loose during shipping, check all packing material. Snap them back into position as shown. 6. Slide the trolley assembly toward the screwdriver as shown. 7. Slide the rail onto the U bracket, until it reaches all the stops on the top and sides of the U bracket. Screwdriver U Bracket (TO MOTOR UNIT) Rail Tab On Top Trolley Trolley Front Rail Section
(TO DOOR) Wear Pads Wear Pads 9 Assembly STEP 2 Fasten the Rail to the Motor Unit MODEL C2405 To avoid SERIOUS damage to garage door opener, use ONLY those bolts/fasteners mounted in the top of the opener. 1. Insert a1/4-20 x 1-3/4 bolt into the cover protection bolt hole on the back end of the rail as shown. Tighten securely with a1/4-20 lock nut. DO NOT over tighten. 2. Remove the bolts from the top of the motor unit. 3. 4. Place the U bracket, flat side down onto the motor unit and align the bracket holes with Use the carton to support the front end of the rail. the bolt holes. 5. Fasten the U bracket with the previously removed bolts; DO NOT use any power tools. The use of power tools may permanently damage the garage door opener. 6. Attach chain spreader to the motor unit with two screws. HARDWARE Bolt 1/4-20x1-
3/4 Lock Nut 1/4-20 Hex Screws 8-32x7/16 Chain Spreader Bolts (Mounted in the garage door opener) U Bracket Bolt Cover Protection Bolt Hole Lock Nut 10 Assembly STEP 3 Install the Idler Pulley 1. Lay the chain/cable beside the rail, as shown. Grasp the end of the cable and pass approximately 12 (30 cm) of cable through the window. Allow it to hang until Assembly Step 4. 2. Remove the tape from the idler pulley. The inside center should be pre-greased. If dry, re-grease to ensure proper operation. 3. Place the idler pulley into the window as shown. 4. Insert the idler bolt from the top through the rail and pulley. Tighten with a 3/8 lock washer and nut underneath the rail until the lock washer is compressed. 5. Rotate the pulley to be sure it spins freely. 6. Locate the rail tab. The rail tab is near the idler pulley on the front rail section. Use a flat head screwdriver and lift the rail tab until the tab is vertical (90). Bolt HARDWARE Nut 3/8 Lock Washer 3/8 Rail Tab Chain/cable Bolt Rail Lock Washer Nut Grease Inside Pulley Idler Pulley 11 Assembly STEP 4 Install the Chain 1. Pull the cable around the idler pulley and toward the trolley. 2. Connect the cable to the retaining slot on the trolley, as shown. (Figure1) a. Push pins of master link bar through cable link and trolley slot. b. Push master link cap over pins and past pin notches. c. Slide the closed end of the clip-on spring over one of the pins. Push the open end of the clip-on spring onto the other pin. Threaded Shaft HARDWARE Master Link 3. 4. With the trolley against the screwdriver, dispense the remainder of the cable/chain along the rail toward the motor unit around the sprocket and continuing to the trolley assembly. The sprocket teeth must engage the chain. (Figure 2) Check to make sure the chain is not twisted, then connect it to the threaded shaft with the remaining master link. 5. Thread the inner nut and lock washer onto the trolley threaded shaft. 6. Insert the trolley threaded shaft through the hole in the trolley. Be sure the chain is not twisted. c. b.
(Figure 3) 7. Loosely thread the outer nut on to the trolley threaded shaft. 8. Remove the screwdriver. a. Figure 1 Sprocket Figure 2 Figure 3 Master Link Inner Nut Lock Washer Threaded Shaft Master Link Outer Nut 12 Assembly STEP 5 Tighten the Chain 1. Spin the inner nut and lock washer down the trolley threaded shaft, away from the trolley. 2. To tighten the chain, turn the outer nut in the direction shown. 3. When the chain is approximately 1/4 (6 mm) above the base of the rail at its midpoint, re-tighten the inner nut to secure the adjustment. Sprocket noise can result if the chain is too loose. When installation is complete, you may no-
tice some chain droop with the door closed. This is normal. If the chain returns to the position shown when the door is open, do not re-adjust the chain. NOTE: During future maintenance, ALWAYS pull the emergency release handle to disconnect the trolley before adjusting the chain. To Tighten Outer Nut Outer Nut Lock Washer Trolley Threaded Shaft Inner Nut To Tighten Inner Nut Chain 1/4 (6 mm) Base of Rail Mid length of Rail STEP 6 Install the Sprocket Cover MODEL C2212T WARNING To avoid possible SERIOUS INJURY to finger from moving garage door opener:
Securely attach sprocket cover BEFORE operating. ALWAYS keep hand clear of sprocket while operating opener. 1. Position the sprocket cover over the sprocket as shown and fasten to the mounting plate with #8x3/8 hex screws provided. HARDWARE Hex Screw #8x3/8(Packed with the sprocket cover) Hex Screw Sprocket Cover You have now finished assembling your garage door opener. Please read the following warnings before proceeding to the installation section. 13 Installation IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS WARNING To reduce the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH:
1. READ AND FOLLOW ALL INSTALLATION WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS. 2. Install garage door opener ONLY on properly balanced and lubricated garage door. An improperly balanced door may NOT reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. ALL repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware MUST be made by a trained door systems technician BEFORE installing opener. Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to garage door BEFORE installing opener to avoid entanglement. 3. 4. 5. Where possible, install the door opener 7 feet (2.13 m) or more above the floor. 6. Mount the emergency release within reach, but at least 6 feet (1.83 m) above the floor and avoiding contact with vehicles to avoid accidental release. 7. NEVER connect garage door opener to power source until instructed to do so. 8. NEVER wear watches, rings or loose clothing while installing or servicing opener. They could be caught in garage door or opener mechanisms. 9. Install wall-mounted garage door control:
within sight of the garage door. out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface. away from ALL moving parts of the door. 10. Place entrapment warning label on wall next to garage door control in a prominent location. 11. Place emergency release/safety reverse test label in plain view on inside of garage door. 12. Upon completion of installation, test safety reversal system. Door MUST reverse on contact with a 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. 13. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. 14. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. 14 Installation STEP 1 Determine the Header Bracket Location Header Wall Vertical Centerline of Garage Door OPTIONAL CEILING MOUNT FOR HEADER BRACKET WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
Header bracket MUST be RIGIDLY fastened to structural support on header wall or ceiling, otherwise garage door might NOT reverse when required. DO NOT install header bracket over drywall. Concrete anchors MUST be used if mounting header bracket or 2x4 into masonry. NEVER try to loosen, move or adjust garage door, springs, cables, pulleys, brackets, or their hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension. ALWAYS call a trained door systems technician if garage door binds, sticks, or is out of balance. An unbalanced garage door might NOT reverse when required. Installation procedures vary according to garage door types. Follow the instructions which apply to your door. 1. Close the door and mark the inside vertical centerline of the garage door. 2. Extend the line onto the header wall above the door. You can fasten the header bracket within 4 feet (1.22 m) of the left or right of the door center only if a torsion spring or center bearing plate is in the way; or you can attach it to the ceiling (see page 16) when clearance is minimal. (It may be mounted on the wall upside down if necessary, to gain approximately 1/2 (1 cm). If you need to install the header bracket on a 2x4 (on wall or ceiling), use lag screws (not provided) to securely fasten the 2x4 to structural supports as shown here and on page 16. 3. Open your door to the highest point of travel as shown. Draw an intersecting horizontal line on the header wall 2 (5 cm) above the high point:
2 (5 cm) above the high point for sectional door and one-piece door with track. 8 (20 cm) above the high point for one-piece door without track. This height will provide travel clearance for the top edge of the door. NOTE: If the total number of inches exceeds the height available in your garage, use the maximum height possible, or refer to page 16 for ceiling installation. 2x4 Structural Supports Unfinished Ceiling 2x4 Level
(Optional) Sectional door with curved track One-piece door with horizontal track Header Wall 2 (5 cm) Track Highest Point of Travel Door Door Header Wall 2 (5 cm) Track Highest Point of Travel One-piece door without track:
jamb hardware One-piece door without track:
pivot hardware Header Wall 8 (20 cm) Highest Point of Travel Door Jamb Hardware Door Header Wall 8 (20 cm) Highest Point of Travel Pivot 15 Installation STEP 2 Install the Header Bracket You can attach the header bracket either to the wall above the garage door, or to the ceiling. Follow the instructions which will work best for your particular requirements. Do not install the header bracket over drywall. If installing into masonry, use concrete anchors (not provided). WALL INSTALLATION Wall Mounting Holes 2x4 Structural Support HARDWARE Lag Screw 5/16-9x1-5/8 OPTION A - WALL INSTALLATION 1. Center the bracket on the vertical centerline with the bottom edge of the bracket on the horizon-
tal line as shown (with the arrow pointing toward the ceiling). 2. Mark the vertical set of bracket holes. Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten the bracket securely to a structural support with the hardware provided. OPTION B - CEILING INSTALLATION 1. Extend the vertical centerline onto the ceiling as shown. 2. Center the bracket on the vertical mark, no more than 6 (15 cm) from the wall. Make sure the arrow is pointing away from the wall. The bracket can be mounted flush against the ceiling when clearance is minimal. 3. Mark the side holes. Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten bracket securely to a structural support with the hardware provided. Header Wall Header Bracket Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Lag Screw Door Spring Garage Door Finished Ceiling Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Lag Screw Header Wall UP Horizontal Line Optional Mounting Holes Highest Point of Garage Door Travel CEILING INSTALLATION Ceiling Mounting Holes UP Header Bracket 6 (15 cm) Maximum Door Spring Garage Door 16 Installation STEP 3 Attach the Rail to the Header Bracket 1. Position the opener on the garage floor below the header bracket. Use packing material as a protective base. NOTE: If the door spring is in the way, you will need help. Have someone hold the opener securely on a temporary support to allow the rail to clear the spring. 2. Position the rail bracket against the header bracket. 3. Align the bracket holes and join with a clevis pin as shown. 4. Insert a ring fastener to secure. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/2 Clevis Pin Ring Fastener Ring Fastener STEP 4 Position the Garage Door Opener To prevent damage to garage door, rest garage door opener rail on 2x4 placed on top section of door. 1. 2. Remove the packing material and lift the garage door opener onto a ladder. Fully open the door and place a 2x4 (laid flat) under the rail. For one-piece doors without tracks, lay the 2x4 on its side. NOTE: A 2x4 is ideal for setting the distance between the rail and the door. If the ladder is not tall enough you will need help at this point. If the door hits the trolley when it is raised, pull the trolley release arm down to disconnect the inner and outer trolley. Slide the outer trolley toward the garage door opener. The trolley can remain disconnected until instructed. Connected Disconnected 2x4 2x4 One-piece door without tracks All other door types 17 Installation STEP 5 Hang the Garage Door Opener HARDWARE WARNING To avoid possible SERIOUS INJURY from a falling garage door opener, fasten it SECURELY to structural supports of the garage. Concrete anchors MUST be used if installing ANY brackets into masonry. Hanging the garage door opener will vary depending on your garage. Below are three example installations. Your installation may be different. For ALL installations the garage door opener MUST be connected to structural supports. The instructions illustrate one of the examples below. EXAMPLES Lag Screw 5/16-
9x1-5/8 Nut 5/16-18 Hex Bolt 5/16-
18x7/8 Lock Washer 5/16-18 1. 2. On finished ceilings, use the lag screws to attach a support bracket (not provided) to the structural supports before installing the garage door opener. Make sure the garage door opener is aligned with the header bracket. Measure the distance from each side of the garage door opener to the support bracket. 3. Cut both pieces of the hanging bracket to required lengths. 4. Attach the end of each hanging bracket to the support bracket (not provided) with appropriate hardware (not provided). Attach the garage door opener to the hanging brackets with the hex bolts, lock washers, and nuts. Remove the 2x4 and manually close the door. If the door hits the rail, raise the header bracket. 5. 6. Finished Ceiling Unfinished Ceiling 1 Finished Ceiling 2 Not Provided 3 Not Provided Lag Screw Lag Screw 4 Not Provided 18 6 5. Lock Washer Hex Bolt Nut Installation STEP 6 Install the Light Bulbs CAUTION To prevent possible OVERHEATING of the end panel or light socket:
Use ONLY A19 light bulbs. DO NOT use incandescent bulbs larger than 100W. DO NOT use compact fluorescent light bulbs larger than 26W (100W equivalent). DO NOT use halogen bulbs. DO NOT use short neck or specialty light bulbs. LED bulbs may cause remote control radio interference. Use ONLY LED bulbs recommended here: chamberlain.com/bulb. 1. Pull light lens down. 2. Insert light bulb. 3. Close light lens. or o or o or o STEP 7 Attach the Emergency Release Rope and Handle WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a falling garage door:
If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly. NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. NEVER use handle to pull door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. 1. Insert one end of the emergency release rope through the handle. Make sure that NOTICE is right side up. Secure with an overhand knot at least 1 (2.5 cm) from the end of the rope to prevent slipping. 2. Insert the other end of the emergency release rope through the hole in the trolley release arm. Mount the emergency release within reach, but at least 6 feet (1.83 m) above floor, avoiding contact with vehicles to prevent accidental release and secure with an overhand knot. NOTE: If it is necessary to cut the emergency release rope, seal the cut end with a match or lighter to prevent unraveling. Ensure the emergency release rope and handle are above the top of all vehicles to avoid entanglement. 19 Installation STEP 8 Install the Door Bracket CAUTION Fiberglass, aluminum or lightweight steel garage doors WILL REQUIRE reinforcement BEFORE installation of door bracket. Contact the garage door manufacturer or installing dealer for opener rein-
forcement instructions or reinforcement kit. Failure to reinforce the top section as required according to the door manufacturer may void the door warranty. A horizontal and vertical reinforcement is needed for lightweight garage doors (fiberglass, aluminum, steel, doors with glass panel, etc.) (not provided). A horizontal reinforcement brace should be long enough to be secured to two or three vertical supports. A vertical reinforcement brace should cover the height of the top panel. Contact the garage door manufacturer or installing dealer for opener reinforce-
ment instructions or reinforcement kit. NOTE: Many door reinforcement kits provide for direct attachment of the clevis pin and door arm. In this case you will not need the door bracket; proceed to the next step. OPTION A - SECTIONAL DOORS 1. Center the door bracket on the previously marked vertical centerline used for the header bracket installation. Note correct UP placement, as stamped inside bracket. 2. Position the top edge of the bracket 2-4 (5-10 cm) below the top edge of the door, OR directly below any structural support across the top of the door. 3. Mark, drill holes and install as follows, depending on your doors construction. Metal or light weight doors using a vertical angle iron brace in the door panel support and the door bracket:
Drill 3/16 fastening holes. Secure the door bracket using the two 1/4-14x5/8 self-threading screws. (Figure 1) Alternately, use two 5/16-18x2 bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided). (Figure 2) Metal, insulated or light weight factory reinforced doors:
Drill 3/16 fastening holes. Secure the door bracket using the self-threading screws. (Figure 3) Wood doors:
Use top and bottom or side to side door bracket holes. Drill 5/16 holes through the door and secure bracket with 5/16-18x2 carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided). (Figure 4) NOTE: The 1/4-14x5/8 self-threading screws are not intended for use on wood doors. HARDWARE Self-Threading Screw 1/4-14x5/8 Horizontal Reinforcement Vertical Reinforcement FIGURE 1 Door Bracket Self-Threading Screw FIGURE 3 Vertical Reinforcement Vertical Centerline of Garage Door UP Vertical Centerline of Garage Door UP FIGURE 2 Vertical Reinforcement Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Door Bracket UP Inside Edge of Door or Reinforcement Board UP Hardware
(not provided) FIGURE 4 Hardware
(not provided) Self-Threading Screw Vertical Centerline of Garage Door 20 Installation STEP 8 Install the Door Bracket (continued) OPTION B - ONE-PIECE DOORS 1. Center the door bracket on the top of the door, in line with the header bracket as shown. 2. Mark either the left and right, or the top and bottom holes. Metal Doors:
Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten the bracket with the self-threading screws provided. Wood Doors:
Drill 5/16 holes and use 5/16-18x2 carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided) or 5/16x1-1/2 lag screws (not provided) depending on your installation needs. NOTE: The door bracket may be installed on the top edge of the door if required for your installation. (Refer to the dotted line optional placement drawing.) Header Wall Header Bracket 2x4 Support
(Finished Ceiling) Door Bracket Optional Placement of Door Bracket Vertical Centerline of Garage Door For a door with no exposed framing, or for the optional installation, use lag screws 5/16x1-1/2 (not provided) to fasten the door bracket. Metal Door Self-Threading Screw Wood Door Door Bracket Top of Door
(Inside Garage) Door Bracket Top Edge of Door Optional Placement Hardware (not provided) Top of Door
(Inside Garage) Top Edge of Door Optional Placement Hardware (not provided) 21 Installation STEP 9 Connect the Door Arm to the Trolley Installation will vary according to the garage door type. Follow the instructions which apply to your door. OPTION A - SECTIONAL DOORS IMPORTANT: The groove on the straight door arm MUST face away from the curved door arm. 1. Close the door. Disconnect the trolley by pulling the emergency release handle. 2. Attach the straight door arm to the outer trolley using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. 3. Attach the curved door arm to the door bracket using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring 4. 5. fastener. Bring arm sections together. Find two pairs of holes that line up and join sections. Select holes as far apart as possible to increase door arm rigidity and attach using the bolts, nuts, and lock washers. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener until the trolley release arm is horizontal. The trolley will re-engage automatically when the garage door opener is activated. NOTE: If the holes in the curved door arm and the straight door arm do not align, reverse the straight door arm, select two holes (as far apart as possible) and attach using bolts, nuts, and lock washers. If the straight door arm is hanging down too far, you may cut 6 (15 cm) from the solid end. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 Ring Fastener Lock Washer 5/16-18 Nut 5/16-18 Ring Fastener Lock Washer Nut Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt Cut If Needed Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Straight Door Arm
(Groove facing out) Curved Door Arm 22 Installation STEP 9 Connect the Door Arm to the Trolley (continued) OPTION B - ONE-PIECE DOORS IMPORTANT: The groove on the straight door arm MUST face away from the curved door arm. 1. Close the door. Disconnect the trolley by pulling the emergency release handle. 2. Fasten the straight door arm and the curved door arm together to the longest possible length
(with a 2 or 3 hole overlap) using the bolts, nuts, and lock washers. Attach the straight door arm to the door bracket using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Attach the curved door arm to the trolley using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener until the trolley release arm is horizontal. 3. 4. 5. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 Ring Fastener Lock Washer 5/16 -18 Nut 5/16-18 Straight Door Arm
(Groove facing out) Curved Door Arm One-Piece Door without Track Ring Fastener Ring Fastener Nut Lock Washer Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Hex Bolts One-Piece Door with Track Ring Fastener Ring Fastener Nut Lock Washer Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Hex Bolts 23 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 1. Strip 1/4 (6 mm) of insulation from one end of the wire and separate the wires. 2. Connect one wire to each of the two screws on the back of the door control. The wires can be connected to either screw. 3. Mount the door control with the hardware provided. 1 2 3 1/4 (6 mm) Installation STEP 10 Install the Door Control PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution:
Be sure power is NOT connected BEFORE installing door control. Connect door control ONLY to 12 VOLT low voltage wires. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a closing garage door:
Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a mini-
mum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. NEVER permit children to operate or play with door control push buttons or remote control transmitters. Activate door ONLY when it can be seen clearly, is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight until completely closed. NEVER permit anyone to cross path of closing garage door. INTRODUCTION Install the door control within sight of the door at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, where small children cannot reach, and away from the moving parts of the door. NOTE: Your product may look different than the illustrations. HARDWARE Screw 6ABx1-1/2 (2) Drywall Anchors (2) 24 Installation MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution:
Be sure power is NOT connected BEFORE installing door control. Connect door control ONLY to 12 VOLT low voltage wires. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a closing garage door:
Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a mini-
mum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. NEVER permit children to operate or play with door control push buttons or remote control transmitters. Activate door ONLY when it can be seen clearly, is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight until completely closed. NEVER permit anyone to cross path of closing garage door. INTRODUCTION Older Chamberlain door controls and third party products are not compatible. Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. For gang box installations it is not necessary to drill holes or install the drywall anchors. Use the existing holes in the gang box. NOTE: Your product may look different than the illustrations. Screw 6-32x1 (2) HARDWARE Screw 6ABx1 (2) Drywall Anchors (2) 1. Strip 7/16 (11 mm) of insulation from one end of the wire and separate the wires. 2. Connect one wire to each of the two screws on the back of the door control. The wires can be connected to either screw. If your garage is pre-wired for the door control choose any two wires to connect, note which wires are used so the correct wires are connected to the garage door opener in a later step. Install the bottom screw, allowing 1/8 (3 mm) to protrude from the wall. 3. Mark the location of the bottom mounting hole and drill a 5/32 hole. 4. 5. Position the bottom hole of the door control over the screw and slide down into place. 6. Lift the push bar up and mark the top hole. 7. Remove the door control from the wall and drill a 5/32 hole for the top screw. 8. Position the bottom hole of the door control over the screw and slide down into place. Attach the top screw. 1 7/16 (11 mm) 2 3 Wall DRYWALL GANG BOX Drywall Anchor 6-32x1 6ABx1 4-5 7 6 8 DRYWALL GANG BOX Drywall Anchor 6-32x1 6ABx1 25 Installation STEP 11 Wire the Door Control to the Garage Door Opener 1. Run the white and red/white wire from the door control to the garage door opener. Attach the wire to the wall and ceiling with the staple (not applicable for gang box or pre-wired installa-
tions). Do not pierce the wire with the staple as this may cause a short or an open circuit. 2. Strip 7/16 (11 mm) of insulation from the end of the wire near the garage door opener. 3. Connect the wire to the red and white terminals on the garage door opener. If your garage is pre-wired make sure you use the same wires that are connected to the door control. To insert or release wires from the terminal, push in the tab with screwdriver tip. 1 3 HARDWARE Insulated Staple (Not Shown) 2 7/16 (11 mm) Staple Wire channel E T I H W D E R STEP 12 Attach the Warning Labels 1. Attach the entrapment warning label on the wall near the door control with tacks or staples. Attach the manual release/safety reverse test label in a visible location on the inside of the garage door. 2. 26 Installation STEP 13 Install the Protector System WARNING Be sure power is NOT connected to the garage door opener BEFORE installing the safety reversing sensor. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from closing garage door:
Correctly connect and align the safety reversing sensor. This required safety device MUST NOT be disabled. Install the safety reversing sensor so beam is NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above garage floor. Hex Screw 10-24 (2) HARDWARE Wing Nut (2) The safety reversing sensors are designed to clip onto the door track with the provided sensor brackets. If the door track will not support the sensor bracket a wall installation is recommended. The sensor beam should be NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above the floor. DOOR TRACK INSTALLATION 1. Slide the curved arms of the sensor bracket around the edge of the door track. Snap into place so that the sensor bracket is flush against the track. IMPORTANT: The safety reversing sensors MUST be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. 2. Slide the hex screw through the sensor. 3. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the The Protector System includes two safety reversing sensors which use a light beam to prevent the garage door from closing. The sending sensor (amber LED) transmits the beam to the receiving sensor (green LED) when both are powered and aligned. If an obstruction breaks the light beam while the door is closing, the door will stop, and reverse to the full open position. When installing the safety reversing sensors, check:
Sensors are installed INSIDE the garage. Sensor lenses are facing each other. IMPORTANT: Do not allow direct sunlight to the receiving sensor
(green LED). Sensor beam is NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above the floor and the light beam is unobstructed. Safety Reversing Sensor Light Beam Protection Area Safety Reversing Sensor bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite door track. Both lenses must face each other. Door track Garage door 3 Wing nut 6 (15 cm) max. 1 2 27 Installation STEP 13 Install the Protector System (continued) WALL OPTION Make sure the brackets on each side are clear of the door track and have the same amount of clearance so the sensors will align correctly. If additional clearance is needed, use extension brackets 041A5281-1 (not provided) or wood blocks. 1. Attach the sensor bracket against the wall with two lag screws (not provided). 2. Slide the hex screw through the sensor. 3. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite side of the garage door. Both lenses must face each other. 1 Door track Inside garage wall Not provided 2 3 OPTIONAL OR Wing Nut 6 (15 cm) max. FLOOR OPTION 1. Measure the position of both sensor brackets so they will be the same distance from the wall and not obstructed. 2. Attach the bracket to the floor with concrete anchors (not provided). 3. Slide the hex screw through the sensor. 4. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite side of the garage door. Both lenses must face each other. Inside garage wall 2 Not provided Door track 4 Wing nut 6 (15 cm) max. 1 3 28 Installation STEP 14 Wire the Safety Reversing Sensors If your garage has pre-installed wiring for the safety reversing sensors, see OPTION B - PRE-
WIRED INSTALLATION page 29. OPTION A - INSTALLATION WITH NO PRE-WIRING 1. Run the wire from both sensors to the garage door opener. Attach with staples, but DO NOT puncture the wire. 2. Separate the sensor wires and strip insulation from each end. Twist the two white wires together. Then twist the two white/black wires together. 3. Using a screwdriver, push in the terminal tabs, and insert the white wires into the white terminal. Insert the white/black wires into the grey terminal. 1 3 29 HARDWARE Insulated Staple (Not Shown) 2 Staple 7/16 (11 mm) E T I H W E T I H W Y E R G D E R
1 2 | 114-5744-010 EN Part2 | Users Manual | 3.93 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
Installation STEP 14 Wire the Safety Reversing Sensors (continued) OPTION A - PRE-WIRED INSTALLATION 1. 2. Cut the sensor wires, making sure there is enough wire to reach the pre-installed wires from the wall. Separate the sensor wires and strip insulation from each end. Choose two of the pre-installed wires and strip insulation from each end. Choose the same color pre-installed wires for each sensor. 3. Connect the pre-installed wires to the sensor wires with wire nuts making sure the colors 4. 5. correspond for each sensor. At the garage door opener, strip the end of the wires previously connected to the sensors. Twist the like-colored wires together. Using a screwdriver, push in the terminal tabs, and insert the wire color connected to the sensors white wire into the white terminal. Insert the other wire color connected to the sensors white/black wire into the grey terminal. Safety reversing sensor wires Safety reversing sensor wires White White/Black Pre-installed wires 7/16 (11 mm) Wire nuts (not provided) Pre-installed wires Yellow (for example) Purple (for example) Purple Yellow Y E R G E T I H W Pre-installed wires Wire channel Yellow Purple 7/16 (11 mm) 30 Installation STEP 15 Connect Power WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution or fire:
Be sure power is NOT connected to the opener, and disconnect power to circuit BEFORE removing cover to establish permanent wiring connection. Garage door installation and wiring MUST be in compliance with ALL local electrical and building codes. NEVER use an extension cord, 2-wire adapter, or change plug in ANY way to make it fit outlet. Be sure the opener is grounded. To avoid installation difficulties, do not run the opener at this time. To reduce the risk of electric shock, your garage door opener has a grounding type plug with a third grounding pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type outlet. If the plug doesnt fit into the outlet you have, contact a qualified electrician to install the proper outlet. THERE ARE TWO OPTIONS FOR CONNECTING POWER:
OPTION A- TYPICAL WIRING 1. Plug in the garage door opener into a grounded outlet. 2. DO NOT run garage door opener at this time. OPTION B - PERMANENT WIRING If permanent wiring is required by your local code, refer to the following procedure. To make a permanent connection through the 7/8-inch hole in the top of the motor unit (according to local code):
1. Remove the motor unit cover screws and set the cover aside. 2. Remove the attached 3-prong cord. 3. Connect the black (line) wire to the screw on the brass terminal; the white (neutral) wire to the screw on the silver terminal; and the ground wire to the green ground screw. The opener must be grounded. 4. Reinstall the cover. Ground Tab Green Ground Screw Black Wire Ground Wire White Wire 31 Installation STEP 16 Align the Safety Reversing Sensors IMPORTANT: The safety reversing sensors MUST be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. When the garage door opener has power, check the safety reversing sensors. If the sensors are aligned and wired correctly, both LEDs will glow steadily. Light Beam Protection Area SAFETY SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTING If either of the sensor LEDs are off, there is no power to the sensor:
1. Check that you have power to the garage door opener. 2. Check the sensor wire is not shorted or broken. 3. Check that the sensors are wired correctly; white wires to white terminal and white/black wires to grey terminal. 1 3 2 Sending sensor - amber LED To align the safety reversing sensors:
Receiving sensor - green LED The receiving sensor will have a sticker on the back. 1. Loosen the wing nuts. 2. Adjust the sensors up or down until both LEDs glow steady indicating alignment. 3. Tighten the wing nut to secure the sensor. D E R E T I H W Y E R G If the green receiving sensor LED is blinking, the sensors are obstructed or misaligned:
1. Check for obstructions in the sensor light beam. 2. Align the sensors. 3. If the receiving sensor (green LED) faces direct sunlight, switch the receiving sensor with the sending sensor and repeat STEP 12 Install the Protector System page 27 to assure proper operation. STEP 17 Ensure the Door Control is Wired Correctly If the door control has been installed and wired correctly, the command LED on the control panel will blink or the LED behind the push button will blink if installed correctly. Wing nut 32 Adjustments Introduction WARNING ONE-PIECE DOORS ONLY When setting the UP travel for a one-piece door ensure that the door does not slant backwards when fully open (UP). If the door is slanted backwards this will cause unnecessary bucking and/or jerking when the door is opening or closing. Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. Incorrect adjustment of garage door travel limits will interfere with proper operation of safety reversal system. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on floor. Correct Incorrect To prevent damage to vehicles, be sure fully open door provides adequate clearance. Your garage door opener is designed with electronic controls to make setup and adjustments easy. PROGRAMMING BUTTONS The programming buttons are located on the left side panel of the garage door opener and are used to program the travel. While programming, the UP and DOWN buttons can be used to move the door as needed. UP Button Adjustment Button DOWN Button PROGRAMMING BUTTONS UP (Open) DOWN (Close) 33 Adjustments 1 Program the Travel WARNING Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. Incorrect adjustment of garage door travel limits will interfere with proper operation of safety reversal system. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on floor. Note: While programming, the UP and DOWN buttons can be used to move the door as needed. 1 Press and hold the Adjustment Button until the UP Button begins to flash and/or a beep is heard. The Safety Reversing Sensors will be disconnected during the Program the Travel process. 3 Once the door is in the desired UP position press and release the Adjustment Button. The garage door opener lights will flash twice and the DOWN Button will begin to flash. 2 Press and hold the UP Button until the door is in the desired UP position. 4 Press and hold the DOWN Button until the door is in the desired DOWN position. 34 5 Once the door is in the desired DOWN position press and release the Adjustment Button. The garage door opener lights will flash twice. Program the Travel is now complete. If the garage door opener lights flash 5 times, then programming has timed out and the Travel Limits have not been set. Please restart the Program the Travel process. 2 Automatic Force Set Up Once both the up and down positions have been manually set, the Safety Reversing Sensors will reconnect and become operational. Then, the opener will enter a force-sensing operation by automatically moving the door to open and close. The garage door opener will sound an audible and visual alert before automatically opening and closing the door. The garage door opener will beep three times, confirming that the Automatic Force Setup completed successfully. Adjustment is complete. If you hear one long beep after the door attempts to move, then the Automatic Force Set Up has not completed successfully. Please start over at step 1 of Program the Travel. Adjustments 3 Test the Safety Reversal System 4 Test the Protector System WARNING WARNING Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. Safety reversal system MUST be tested every month. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. 1 With the door fully open, place a 1-1/2 inch (3.8 cm) board (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor, centered under thegarage door. Without a properly installed safety reversing sensor, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. 1 Open the door. Place an obstruction in the path of thedoor. 2 With the door fully open, place a 1-1/2 inch (3.8 cm) board (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor, centered under thegarage door. 2 Press the remote control push button to close the door. The door will not move more than an inch
(2.5 cm). The garage door opener will not close from a remote control if the LED in either safety reversing sensor is off (alerting you to the fact that the sensor is misaligned or obstructed). If the garage door opener closes the door when the safety reversing sensor is obstructed (and the sensors are no more than 6 inches [15 cm] above the floor), call for a trained door systems technician. If the door stops but does not reverse:
1. Repeat Program the Travel (seeAdjustment Step 1);
2. Repeat the Safety Reversal test. If the test continues to fail, call a trained door systems technician. 35 Battery Backup STEP 1 Install the Battery MODEL C2212T WARNING To reduce the risk of FIRE or INJURY to persons:
Disconnect ALL electric and battery power BEFORE performing ANY service or maintenance. Use ONLY Chamberlain part # G4228 for replacement battery. DO NOT dispose of battery in fire. Battery may explode. Check with local codes for disposal instructions. CAUTION ALWAYS wear protective gloves and eye protection when changing the battery or working around the battery compartment. The 12V battery backup allows access in and out of your garage, even when the power is out. The battery does not have to be fully charged to operate the garage door opener. When the garage door opener is operating on battery power, it may run slower and the following features are disabled:
Garage door opener lights myQ App control and monitoring Unattended close including Timer-to-Close Battery Status LED 1. Unplug the garage door opener. 2. Open the light lens of the garage door opener. Use a Phillips head screwdriver to remove the battery cover on the garage door opener. 3. Partially insert the battery into the battery compartment with the terminals facing out. 4. Connect red (+) and black (-) wires from the garage door opener to the corresponding terminals on the battery. 5. Replace the battery cover. 6. Plug in the garage door opener. 7. Wait for the green Battery Status LED to start flashing before proceeding to test the battery. 36 Test the Battery Depending on the power level, the battery may need to charge before performing the test. The garage door opener must be unplugged to test the battery. 1. Open and close the door using the remote control or door control. While the motor is on, the battery status LED will either glow solid orange indicating opener is operating on battery power or will flash indicating low battery power. NOTE: The garage door opener may run slower if the battery is not fully charged. Plug in the garage door opener. Verify the battery status LED is flashing green, indicating the battery is charging. 2. Charge the Battery The battery charges when the garage door opener is plugged into a 120Vac electrical outlet that has power and requires 24 hours to fully charge. A fully charged battery supplies 12Vdc to the garage door opener for up to 24 hours of normal operation during an electrical power outage. After the electrical power has been restored, the battery will recharge within 24 hours. The battery will last approximately 1 to 2 years with normal usage. Instructions for replacement are provided with the battery. To obtain maximum battery life and prevent damage, disconnect the battery when the garage door opener is unplugged for an extended period of time, such as a summer or winter home. Battery Status Green battery status LED: All systems are normal. A solid green LED light indicates the battery is fully charged. A flashing green LED indicates the battery is being charged. Orange battery status LED: The garage door opener has lost power and is in battery backup mode. Solid orange LED while the motor is on, indicates the garage door opener is operating on battery power. The opener beeps every 2 seconds while operating on battery power. A flashing orange LED while the motor is on, indicates the battery is low. Red battery status LED: The battery needs to be replaced. A solid red LED indicates the battery will no longer hold a charge. Go to chamberlain.com to purchase a replacement battery to allow your system to operate during a power outage. myQ App Control Connect With Your Smartphone*
YOU WILL NEED:
Wi-Fi enabled smartphone, tablet or laptop Broadband Internet connection Wi-Fi signal in the garage (2.4 GHz, 802.11b/g/n required), see page 5 Password for your home network (routers main account, not guest network) myQ serial number located on the garage door opener DOWNLOAD THE myQ APP TO SET UP AN ACCOUNT AND CONNECT Open and close your door, get alerts and set schedules from anywhere. Connected smart garage door openers also receive software updates to ensure the opener has the latest operational features. The garage door opener must run through a complete cycle before it will activate Wi-Fi programming. 1. Download the myQ App. 2. Set up an account and connect. If you already have the myQ App installed:
1. Check that your mobile device has the latest software. 2. Download the latest version of the myQ App. For more information on connecting your garage door opener, visit support.chamberlaingroup.com. NOTES:
To erase the Wi-Fi settings from the opener, see page 39. Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC. App Store and the Apple and App Store logos are trademarks of Apple Inc.
*Smarphone control is not available on models C2102 and D2101. Learn Button LED An LED on the garage door opener will indicate Wi-Fi status. See table below. Wi-Fi Status LED Blue Definition Off - Wi-Fi is not turned on. Blinking - Garage door opener is in Wi-Fi learn mode. Solid - Mobile device connected to the garage door opener. Blue and Green Blinking - Attempting to connect to router. Green Blinking - Attempting to connect to the Internet server. Solid - Wi-Fi has been set up and garage door opener is connected to the Internet. 37 Operation IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS To reduce the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH:
1. READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS. 2. ALWAYS keep remote controls out of reach of children. NEVER permit children to operate or play with garage door control push buttons or remote controls. ONLY activate garage door when it can be seen clearly, it is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight and away from people and objects until completely closed. NO ONE SHOULD CROSS THE PATH OF THE MOVING DOOR. NO ONE SHOULD GO UNDER A STOPPED, PARTIALLY OPENED DOOR. If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Use caution when using this release with the door open. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly and increasing the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. NEVER use handle to pull garage door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. 10. Safety reversal system MUST be tested every month. Garage door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. Failure to adjust the garage door opener properly increases the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 11. ALWAYS KEEP GARAGE DOOR PROPERLY BALANCED (see page 3). An improperly balanced door may NOT reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 12. ALL repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension, MUST be made by a trained door systems technician. 13. ALWAYS disconnect electric power to garage door opener BEFORE making ANY repairs or removing covers. 14. This operator system is equipped with an unattended operation feature. The door could move unexpectedly. NO ONE SHOULD CROSS THE PATH OF THE MOVING DOOR. 15. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. 16. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Using your Garage Door Opener The garage door opener can be activated through a wall-mounted door control, remote control, wireless keyless entry or myQ App. When the door is closed and the garage door opener is activated the door will open. If the door makes contact with an obstruction while opening, the door will stop, opener beeps and lights flash 5 times. When the door is in any position other than closed and the garage door opener is activated, the door will close. If the garage door makes contact with an obstruction while closing, the door will reverse, opener beeps and lights flash 5 times. However, you can close the door if you hold the button on the door control or keyless entry until the door is fully closed. The safety reversing sensors do not affect the opening cycle. The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. 38 The garage door opener lights will turn on when the opener is initially plugged in, the opener is activated, or power is restored after interruption. The garage door opener lights automatically turn off after a set length of time. To adjust the light settings, see Using your Door Control. Operation Using your Door Control MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL Push Bar Command LED LEARN Button LOCK Button LIGHT Button SYNCHRONIZE THE DOOR CONTROL: To synchronize the door control to the garage door opener, press the push bar until the garage door opener activates (it may take up to 3 presses). Test the door control by pressing the push bar; each press of the push bar will activate the garage door opener. PUSH BAR: Press the push bar to open or close the door. LEARN BUTTON: Use to program compatible remote controls, wireless keyless entries and myQ devices to the garage door opener. LOCK: Prevents remote controls from working, while still allowing activation from the door control and keyless entry.
(Factory setting is OFF.) Turn ON:
Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The com-
mand LED will flash as long as the lock feature is on. Turn OFF:
Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The command LED will stop flashing and normal operation will resume. LIGHT BUTTON: Turns the garage door opener lights on or off when pressed. Lights stay on for 4-1/2 minutes (factory setting). The LIGHT button will not control the lights when the door is in motion. To change the amount of time the lights stay on:
Press and hold the LOCK button (approximately 10 seconds) until the garage door opener lights flash. The time interval is indicated by the number of times the garage door opener lights flash:
1 flash is 1-1/2 minutes 2 flashes is 2-1/2 minutes 3 flashes is 3-1/2 minutes 4 flashes is 4-1/2 minutes To cycle through the time intervals repeat the step above. If the push bar LED is continuously blinking, the LOCK feature needs to be turned off. PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL Push Button LIGHT Button SYNCHRONIZE THE DOOR CONTROL: To synchronize the door control to the garage door opener, press the push button until the garage door opener activates (it may take up to 3 presses). PUSH BUTTON: Press the LIGHT button to turn the garage door opener lights on or off. When the lights are turned on they will stay on until the LIGHT button is pressed again, or until the garage door opener is activated. Once the garage door opener is activated the lights will turn off after the specified period of time (the factory setting is 4-1/2 minutes). The LIGHT button will not control the lights when the door is in motion. 39 Operation Remote Control and Keyless Entry PRE-PROGRAMMED REMOTE CONTROL INCLUDED, NO NEED TO PROGRAM THE REMOTE. To add or reprogram a remote control, follow the instructions below. Older Chamberlain remote controls are NOT compatible. PROGRAM USING THE MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL 1. Press the LEARN button on the door control to enter programming mode. The command LED will flash once. 2. Press the LEARN button again, the command LED will flash once again. 3. Remote Control: Press the button on the remote control that you wish to operate your garage door. Keyless Entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press the ENTER button. PROGRAM USING THE PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL 1. Press and hold the light button and the push button until the push button LED begins to blink. 2. Remote control: Press the button on the remote control that you wish to operate your garage door. Keyless entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press the ENTER button. Push Button LIGHT Button PROGRAM USING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER LEARN BUTTON 1. Locate the LEARN Button. 2. Press and immediately release the LEARN button. The LEARN LED will glow steady for 30 seconds. Within 30 seconds... 3. Remote Control: Press and hold the button on the remote control that you wish to use. Key-
less Entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press and hold the ENTER button. Release the button when the garage door opener lights blink or two clicks are heard. 1-2 3 LEARN Button LEARN LED i c k c l i c k c l OR PIN HomeLink If your vehicle is equipped with HomeLink, a Compatibility Bridge (not included) may be necessary for certain vehicles. Visit bridge.chamberlain.com to find out if a Bridge is needed. OR PIN The garage door opener lights will flash (or two clicks will be heard) when the code has been programmed. Repeat the steps for programming additional remote controls or keyless entry devices. If programming is unsuccessful, follow the steps to program using the garage door opener LEARN button. 40 Operation Erase the Memory ERASE ALL REMOTE CONTROLS AND KEYLESS ENTRIES 1. Press and hold the LEARN button on garage door opener until the learn LED goes out
(approximately 6 seconds). All remote control and keyless entry codes are now erased. Reprogram any accessory you wish to use. ERASE ALL DEVICES INCLUDING myQ ENABLED ACCESSORIES 1. Press and hold the LEARN button on garage door opener until the learn LED goes out 2.
(approximately 6 seconds). Immediately press and hold the LEARN button again until the learn LED goes out. All codes are now erased. Reprogram any accessory you wish to use. ERASE THE CONNECTION FROM GARAGE DOOR OPENER TO HOME Wi-Fi NETWORK 1. Press and hold the black adjustment button on the garage door opener until 3 beeps are heard
(Approximately 6 seconds). LEARN Button To Open the Door Manually To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a falling garage door:
If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly. NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. NEVER use handle to pull door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. DISCONNECT THE TROLLEY 1. The door should be fully closed if possible. 2. Pull down on the emergency release handle so the trolley release arm snaps to the vertical position. The door can now be raised and lowered as often as necessary. TO RE-CONNECT THE TROLLEY 1. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener so the trolley release arm snaps to the horizontal position. The trolley will reconnect on the next UP or DOWN operation, either manually or by using the door control or remote control. 41 NOTICE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum 20 cm (8 in.) distance is maintained between users/
bystanders and device. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada ICES standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the in-
structions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Maintenance Maintenance Schedule EVERY MONTH Manually operate door. If it is unbalanced or binding, call a trained door systems technician. Check to be sure door opens and closes fully. Adjust if necessary, see page 33. Test the safety reversal system. Adjust if necessary, see page 35. EVERY YEAR Oil door rollers, bearings and hinges. The garage door opener does not require additional lubrication. Do not grease the door tracks. Test the battery backup and consider replacing the battery to ensure the garage door opener will operate during an electrical power outage, see page 36 to test the battery backup. The Remote Control Battery WARNING If battery is swallowed, immediately notify doctor. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
NEVER allow small children near batteries. To reduce risk of fire, explosion or chemical burn:
Replace ONLY with 3V CR2032 coin batteries. DO NOT recharge, disassemble, heat above 212F (100C) or incinerate. The 3V CR2032 Lithium battery should produce power for up to 3 years. If the battery is low, the remote controls LED will not flash when the button is pressed. To replace battery, pry open the case first in the middle (1), then at each side (2 and 3) with the visor clip. Replace the batteries with only 3V CR2032 coin cell batteries. Insert battery positive side up. Dispose of old batteries properly. 42 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Chart Your garage door opener is programmed with self-diagnostic capabilities. The UP and DOWN arrows on the garage door opener flash the diagnostic codes. DIAGNOSTIC CODE SYMPTOM SOLUTION Flashes Flashes 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 5 The garage door opener will not close. Safety reversing sensors are not installed, connected, or wires may be cut. Inspect sensor wires for a disconnected or cut wire. The garage door opener will not close. The door control will not function. The garage door opener will not close. There is a short or reversed wire for the safety reversing sensors. Inspect safety sensor wire at all staple and connection points, replace wire or correct as needed. The wires for the door control are shorted or the door control is faulty. Inspect door control wires at all staple and connection points, replace wire or correct as needed. Safety reversing sensors are misaligned or were momentarily obstructed. Realign both sensors until both LEDs are glowing steady. Make sure nothing is hanging or mounted on the door that would interrupt the sensors path while closing. Door moves 6-8 (15-20 cm) stops or reverses. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Check wiring connections at travel module and at the logic board. Replace travel module if necessary. No movement, only a single click. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Replace logic board if necessary. Opener hums for 1-2 seconds no movement. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Replace motor if necessary. 6 Door coasts after it has come to a complete stop. Program travel to coasting position or have door balanced by a trained door systems technician. 1-5 No movement, or sound. Replace logic board. 2 3 Unable to set the travel or retain position. Check travel module for proper assembly, replace if necessary. The battery status LED is constantly flashing green. Battery backup charging circuit error, replace the logic board. 1-4 Door is moving, stops or reverses. Opener beeps and lights flash. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. If the door is binding or sticking contact a trained door systems technician. If door is not binding or sticking attempt to reprogram travel, see Program the Travel page 31. 5 6 Opener runs approximately 6-8 (15-20 cm), stops and reverses. Communication error to travel module. Check travel module connections, replace travel module if necessary. The garage door opener will not close. Safety reversing sensors are misaligned or were momentarily obstructed. Realign both sensors to ensure both LEDs are steady and not flickering. Make sure nothing is hanging or mounted on the door that would interrupt the sensors path while closing. 43 Wi-Fi troubleshooting The garage door opener will NOT enter Wi-Fi learn mode:
After the initial installation of the garage door opener, the garage door opener must complete a full cycle (open and closed) before the Wi-Fi learn mode can be activated. If there has been a recent power outage, the garage door opener must complete a full cycle before the Wi-Fi learn mode can be activated. See page 37 to activate Wi-Fi LEARN mode. If your black adjustment button is not solid green go to support.chamberlaingroup.com. My vehicles Homelink is not programming to my garage door opener:
Compatibility Bridge (not included) may be necessary for certain vehicles. Visit bridge.chamberlain. com to find out if a Bridge is needed. My neighbors remote control opens my garage door:
Erase the memory from your garage door opener and reprogram the remote control(s). Safety sensor LED lights are not lit:
If the sensor LEDs do not glow steadily when the opener is activated, see SAFETY SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTING page 32. Troubleshooting Additional Troubleshooting My garage door opener beeps and flashes its lights before door closes:
Garage door opener has been activated through a device or feature such as Timer-to-
Close or garage door monitor. My garage door opener stops, reverses, beeps and flashes its lights:
Check for binding or obstructions anywhere along the track to garage floor. My remote control will not activate the garage door:
Verify the lock feature is not activated on the door control. Reprogram the remote control. If the remote control will still not activate the door check the diagnostic codes to ensure the garage door opener is working properly. My door will not close The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. Check for binding or obstructions anywhere along the track to garage floor. The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. o Verify the safety reversing sensors are properly installed, aligned and free of any obstructions. o If the receiving sensor (green LED) faces direct sunlight, switch the receiving sensor with the sending sensor so the receiving sensor is not in direct sunlight. 44 Warranty Contact Information STOP!
This garage door opener WILL NOT work until the safety reversing sensors are properly installed and aligned. The Chamberlain Group LLC (Seller) warrants to the first retail purchaser of this product, for the residence in which this product is originally installed, that it is free from defects in materials and/or workmanship for a specific period of time as defined below (the Warranty Period). The warranty period commences from the date of purchase. CHAMBERLAIN LIMITED WARRANTY support.chamberlaingroup.com Visit us online at:
The proper operation of this product is dependent on your compliance with the instructions regarding installation, operation, and maintenance and testing. Failure to comply strictly with those instructions will void this limited warranty in its entirety. If, during the limited warranty period, this product appears to contain a defect covered by this limited warranty, visit chamberlain.com, before dismantling this product. You will be advised of disassembly and shipping. Then send the product or component, pre-paid and insured, as directed to our service center for warranty repair. Please include a brief description of the problem and a dated proof-of-
purchase receipt with any product returned for warranty repair. Products returned to Seller for warranty repair, which upon receipt by Seller are confirmed to be defective and covered by this limited warranty, will be repaired or replaced (at Sellers sole option) at no cost to you and returned pre-paid. Defective parts will be repaired or replaced with new or factory-rebuilt parts at Sellers sole option.
[You are responsible for any costs incurred in removing and/or reinstalling the product or any component]. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE FOR THE RELATED COMPONENT(S), AND NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES WILL EXIST OR APPLY AFTER SUCH PERIOD. Some States and Provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER NON-DEFECT DAMAGE, DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION OR CARE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ABUSE, MISUSE, FAILURE TO PROVIDE REASONABLE AND NECESSARY MAINTENANCE, UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS OR ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS PRODUCT), LABOR CHARGES FOR REINSTALLING A REPAIRED OR REPLACED UNIT, REPLACEMENT OF CONSUMABLE ITEMS (E.G., BATTERIES IN REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTERS AND LIGHT BULBS), OR UNITS INSTALLED FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL USE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER ANY PROBLEMS WITH, OR RELATING TO, THE GARAGE DOOR OR GARAGE DOOR HARDWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE DOOR SPRINGS, DOOR ROLLERS, DOOR ALIGNMENT OR HINGES. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ALSO DOES NOT COVER ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY INTERFERENCE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH USE, OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS PRODUCT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLERS LIABILITY FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY EXCEED THE COST OF THE PRODUCT COVERED HEREBY. NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR US ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of consequential, incidental or special damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state and province to province. 45 Automatic Garage Door Opener Safety & Maintenance Guide Garage Door Opener Safety An Automatic Decision A garage door is the largest moving object in the home. An improperly adjusted garage door and opener can exert deadly force when the door closes which could lead to entrapment of children or adults and subsequent injury or death. Proper installation, operation, maintenance, and testing of the garage door and automatic opener are necessary to provide a safe, trouble-free system. Careless operation or allowing children to play with or use garage door opener controls are also dangerous situations that can lead to tragic results. A few simple precautions can protect your family and friends from potential harm. Please review the safety and maintenance tips in this guide carefully and keep it for reference. Check the operation of your garage door and opener to ensure they function in a safe and trouble-free manner. Be sure to read all Important Safety Information found in your garage door openers manual as it provides more details and safety considerations than can be supplied with this guide. Garage Door Openers are Not Toys Discuss garage door and opener safety with your children. Explain the danger of being trapped under the door. Stay away from a moving door. The wall-mounted push button should be out of reach of children, at least 5 feet from the nearest standing surface and away from all moving parts. Mount and use the button where you can clearly see the closing garage door. Keep transmitters and remote controls out of reach of chil-
dren. Do not let children play with or use transmitters or other remote control devices. Keep the door in sight until it completely closes when using the wall-mounted push button or transmitter. 46 Routine Maintenance Can Prevent Tragedies Make monthly inspection and testing of your garage door and opener system a part of your regular routine. Review your owners manual for both the door and door opener. If you dont have the owners manuals, contact the manufacturer(s) and request a copy for your specific model(s). Look for the opener model number on the back of the power unit. WARNING SPRINGS ARE UNDER HIGH TENSION. ONLY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUALS SHOULD ADJUST THEM. Visually check the door and installation:
Starting with the door in the closed position, use the manual disconnect on the opener to disconnect the door. Look for signs of wear or damage on hinges, rollers, springs, and door panels. These parts may require periodic lubrication. Check the owners manual for suggested maintenance. Verify the photo eye height is no higher than 6 from the garage floor. If any signs of damage are evident, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. Test the door for proper operation:
Open and close the door manually using handles or suitable gripping points. The door should move freely and without difficulty. The door should balance and stay partially open 34 feet above the floor. If you detect any signs of improper operation, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. Test the opener safety features:
Reconnect the opener to the door using the manual disconnect and open the door. Place a 2x4 board flat in the path of the door (1) and try to close it (2). The door should stop when it comes in contact with the 2x4 and then reverse direction. Block the photoelectric sensor by waving an object in front of the sensor and attempt to close the door. The door should not close unless the wall-mounted push button is manually held during operation. If the opener does not perform as described, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. 2 1 47 Repair Parts Rail Assembly Parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Chain and cable Pulley Master link Rail Trolley assembly: clevis pin (1) and ring (1) U bracket Not shown Wear pads Hardware bag Installation Parts Part Number Description 041A5807 K144C0056 004A1008 041A5665 041C5141-1 041D0598-1 041A7276 041A7920-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Curved door arm Door bracket with clevis pin and fastener Emergency release rope and handle Header bracket with clevis pin and fastener Remote control visor clip Safety sensor bracket Straight door arm White and red/white wire Safety sensor kit: receiving and sending sensors with 2-conductor wire 041-0136-000 1 2 4 10 3V CR2032 lithium battery Not shown Installation Manual 3 5 4 6 48 1 2 7 3 5 6 8 Part Number 041B0035B 041A5047 041A2828 041A5047-2 K029B0137 041-0155-000 4178B0034B 041B4494-1 K010A0020 114-5744-010 9 10 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Model C2212T 3 10 2 1 12 4 11 9 6 7 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Description Sprocket and sprocket cover Front end panel Light lens Light socket Cover Motor with travel module Travel module End panel for receiver logic board Logic board 12V Battery Terminal block Line cord Not shown Wire harness Transformer Part Number 041B5348-2 041A7618 041-0144 041C0279 041-0229-000 041D8006-1 041D8071-4 041D0233-3 050DCTBMC G4228 041A3150 041B4245 041D9069 041D0277-1 8 49 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - C2102 5 4 3 1 2 13 10 11 14 6 7 8 12 9 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Chain spreader Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Receiver logic board Logic board end panel Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041A7760 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0228-000 045ACTMC 041DB374 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7945 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Model C2405 5 3 4 1 2 8 6 7 13 14 10 11 4 12 9 5 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Chain spreader Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Logic board Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041D0207 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0229-000 045ACTWFMC End panel for receiver logic board with light socket 050ACTBMC Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7945 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Model C2202 5 4 3 1 2 13 10 11 14 6 7 8 12 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Chain spreader Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Logic Board End panel for receiver logic board Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041D0207 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0229-000 045ACTBMC 041-0025-000 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7946 52 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Model D2101 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Chain spreader Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Logic board End panel for receiver logic board with light socket Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041A7760 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0228-000 050ACTBMC 041D8214 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7945 53 54 55 114-5744-010 2022, The Chamberlain Group LLC. All Rights Reserved Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation The Chamberlain Group LLC 300 Windsor Drive Oak Brook, IL 60523
1 2 | 114-5745-010 EN Part1 | Users Manual | 4.97 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
Easy step-by-step interactive 3D instructions for this product can be found in Download the free myQ App Monitor and control your garage from anywhere and get real-time alerts with peace of mind. Available on most iOS and Android Devices Download the free BILT App before assembly Installation Manual Inside Installation Manual Belt Drive Garage Door Opener Models B2202 B2210T B2211T B2212T B2215T B2401 B2405 B353 B4505T FOR RESIDENTIAL USE ONLY PRE-PROGRAMMED REMOTE CONTROL INCLUDED To register your garage door opener to receive updates and offers from Chamberlain, visit chamberlain.registria.com or use the icon below:
1. 2. Take a photo of the camera icon including thepoints (
Send it in by texting the photo to 71403 (US).
). www.chamberlain.com Please read this manual and the enclosed safety materials carefully!
Fasten the manual near the garage door after installation. The door WILL NOT CLOSE unless the Protector System is connected and properly aligned. Periodic checks of the garage door opener are required to ensure safe operation. The model number label is located on the left side panel of your garage door opener. This garage door opener is compatible with myQ and Security+ 2.0 accessories. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. Download the myQ App Available on most iOS and Android Devices Available on most iOS and Android Devices Contents Preparation ......................................................................................................................................5 Assembly..........................................................................................................................................9 Installation ....................................................................................................................................14 Install the Door Control ............................................................................................................24 Install the Protector System ...................................................................................................27 Connect Power ......................................................................................................................... 31 Adjustments ..................................................................................................................................33 Battery Backup .............................................................................................................................36 myQ App Control .........................................................................................................................37 Connect With Your Smartphone ..............................................................................................37 Operation .......................................................................................................................................38 Using your Garage Door Opener ..............................................................................................38 Using your Door Control ...........................................................................................................39 Remote Control and Keyless Entry ...........................................................................................41 HomeLink ................................................................................................................................41 Erase the Memory .....................................................................................................................42 To Open the Door Manually......................................................................................................42 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................43 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................44 Warranty ........................................................................................................................................46 Automatic Garage Door Opener Safety & Maintenance Guide ................................................47 Repair Parts ...................................................................................................................................49 Rail Assembly Parts ..................................................................................................................49 Installation Parts ......................................................................................................................49 Models B2202, B2401, B2405, and B353 ..............................................................................50 Models B2210T, B2211T, B2212T, B2215T, and B4505T ......................................................51 Safety Symbol and Signal Word Review This garage door opener has been designed and tested to offer safe service provided it is installed, operated, maintained and tested in strict accordance with the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Mechanical Electrical When you see these Safety Symbols and Signal Words on the following pages, they will alert you to the possibility of serious injury or death if you do not comply with the warnings that accompany them. The hazard may come from something mechanical or from electric shock. Read the warnings carefully. When you see this Signal Word on the following pages, it will alert you to the possibility of damage to your garage door and/or the garage door opener if you do not comply with the cautionary statements that accompany it. Read them carefully. WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer or birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Unattended Operation The Timer-to-Close (TTC) feature, the myQ App, and myQ Garage Door and Gate Monitor are examples of unattended close and are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. Any device or feature that allows the door to close without being in the line of sight of the door is considered unattended close. The Timer-to-Close (TTC) feature, the myQ App, and any other myQ devices are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. The images throughout this manual are for reference only and your product may look different. 4 Before You Connect with Your Smartphone Monitor and control your garage door from anywhere using the myQ App. You will need a router with Wi-Fi and a smartphone or other mobile device. Make sure your mobile device is connected to your Wi-Fi network. Hold your mobile device in the place where your garage door opener will be installed and check the Wi-Fi signal strength. Check Signal Strength. If you see:
Wi-Fi signal is strong. Youre all set!
Install your new garage door opener. Wi-Fi signal is weak. The garage door opener will likely connect to your Wi-Fi-
network. If not, try one of the options below. No Wi-Fi signal. Try one of the following:
Move your router closer to the garage door opener tominimize interference from walls and other objects Buy a Wi-Fi range extender Visit support.chamberlaingroup.com for more details. See myQ App Control page 37 to connect your garage door opener to your Wi-Fi network. Preparation Check the Door To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
l ALWAYS call a trained door systems technician if garage door binds, sticks, or is out of balance. An unbalanced garage door may NOT reverse when required. l NEVER try to loosen, move or adjust garage door, door springs, cables, pulleys, brackets or their hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension. l Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to garage door BEFORE installation and operating garage door opener to avoid entanglement. lDO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. To prevent damage to garage door and opener:
l ALWAYS disable locks BEFORE installing and operating the opener. lONLY operate garage door opener at 120V, 60 Hz to avoid malfunction and damage. Before you begin:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disable locks and remove any ropes connected to the garage door. Lift the door halfway up. Release the door. If balanced, it should stay in place, supported entirely by its springs. Raise and lower the door to check for binding or sticking. If your door binds, sticks, or is out of balance, call a trained door systems technician. Check the seal on the bottom of the door. Any gap between the floor and the bottom of the door must not exceed 1/4 (6 mm). Otherwise, the safety reversal system may not work properly. The opener should be installed above the center of the door. If there is a torsion spring or center bearing plate in the way of the header bracket, it may be installed within 4 feet (1.2 m) to the left or right of the door center. See page 15. Torsion Spring Extension Spring 5 Preparation Tools Needed Additional Items You May Need:
Survey your garage area to see if you will need any of the following items:
l l
(2)2X4 Pieces of wood : May be used to fasten the header bracket to the structural supports. Also used to position the garage door opener during installation and for testing the safety reversing sensors. Support bracket and fastening hardware: Must be used if you have a finished ceiling in your garage. lSupportbrackets lHangingbrackets Hardware x2 (each) 5/32 3/16 5/16 lExtensionbrackets(Model041A5281-1)orwoodblocks: Depending upon garage construction, extension brackets or wood blocks may beneeded toinstall the safety reversing sensor. Lag screws x4 Lag screws x12 1/2 1/4 7/16 9/16 7/16 Extension Brackets 041A5281-1 Wood Blocks l Fastening hardware: Alternate floor mounting of the safety reversing sensor will require hardware not provided. l Door reinforcement: Required if you have a light weight steel, aluminum, fiberglass or glass panel door. l Railextensionkit: Required if your garage door is more than 7 feet (2.13 m) high. 6 Preparation Carton Inventory Save the carton and packing material until the installation and adjustment is complete. Instructions for the accessories will be attached to the accessory and are not included in this manual. The images throughout this manual are for reference only and your product may look different. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Header bracket Pulley Door bracket Curved door arm Straight door arm
(Packaged inside front rail section) Trolley Emergency release rope and handle Rail (1 front and 4 center sections) Garage door opener (motor unit) 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Sprocket cover and screws 11. 12. Belt 13. The Protector System U bracket Safety reversing sensors with 2 conductor white and white/black wire attached: sending sensor (1), receiving sensor (1), and safety sensor brackets (2) 14. Battery Backup - Model B2210T, B2212T, and B2215T 15. Remote control 16. Wireless keypad - Models B2215T, B2405, and B4505T 17. Push Button Door Control - Models B2202, B2210T, B2211T, B2212T, B2401, and B353 Multi-Function Control Panel - Models B2215T and B2405 Motion Detecting Control Panel - Model B4505T 18. White and red/white wire 19. Installation manual and all warning labels See Hardware page 8. Go to chamberlain.com for replacement or additional accessories:
3-button remote control model 953EV-P2 Wirelesskeypad model 940EV-P2 7 8 x1 2 11 9 10 6 4 14 15 12 8 x4 1 5 17 16 7 7 3 13 x1 13 x1 13 x2 18 19 Preparation Hardware ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Bolt 1/4-20x1-3/4 Bolt Lag Screw 5/16-9x1-5/8 (4) Self-Threading Screw1/4-14x5/8 (2) DOOR CONTROL Models B2405 and B4505T Drywall Anchors (2) Threaded Shaft with Spring Trolley Nut Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/2 Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 (4) Screw 6-32x1 (2) Screw 6ABx1 (2) Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Models B2202, B2212T, and B353 Master Link Hex Screw 10-24 (2) Wing Nut (2) Lock Washer 3/8 Hex Screw #8x3/8(3)
(packed with the sprocket cover) Nut 3/8 Lock Nut1/4-20 Nut 5/16-18 (4) Lock Washer 5/16-18 (4) Ring Fastener(3) Drywall Anchors (2) Screw 6ABx1-1/2 (2) Insulated Staples
(Not Shown) 8 Assembly STEP 1 Assemble the Rail and Install the Trolley To prevent INJURY from pinching, keep hands and fingers away from the joints while assembling the rail. Toavoidinstallationdifficulties,donotrunthegaragedooropeneruntilinstructedtodoso.
The front rail has a cut out window at the door end. The rail tab MUST be on top of the rail when assembled. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the straight door arm and hanging bracket packaged inside the front rail and set aside for Installation Step 5 and 9. NOTE: To prevent INJURY while unpacking the rail carefully remove the straight door arm stored within the rail section. Align the rail sections on a flat surface as shown and slide the tapered ends into the larger ones. Tabs along the side will lock into place. Place the motor unit on packing material to protect the cover, and rest the back end of the rail on top. Forconvenience, put a support under the front end of the rail. As a temporary stop, insert a screwdriver into the hole in the second rail section from the motor unit, asshown. Check to be sure there are 4 plastic wear pads inside the inner trolley. If they became loose during shipping, check all packing material. Snap them back into position as shown. Slide the trolley assembly toward the screwdriver as shown. Slide the rail onto the U bracket, until it reaches all the stops on the top and sides of the U bracket. Slide to stopson top and sidesof U bracket Screwdriver U Bracket
(TOMOTOR UNIT) Rail Tab On Top Trolley Front Rail Section
(TO DOOR) Wear Pads 9 Assembly STEP 2 Fasten the Rail to the Motor Unit HARDWARE To avoid SERIOUS damage to garage door opener, use ONLY those bolts/fasteners mounted in the top of the opener. 1. Insert a1/4-20 x 1-3/4 bolt into the cover protection bolt holeon the back end of the rail as shown. Tighten securely with a1/4-20 locknut. DO NOT overtighten. 2. Remove the bolts from the top of the motor unit. 3. Use the carton to support the front end of the rail. 4. Place theU bracket, flat side down onto the motor unit and align the bracket holes with the bolt holes. 5. Fasten theU bracket with the previously removed bolts; DO NOT use any power tools. The use of power tools may permanently damage the garage door opener. Bolt 1/4-20x1-3/4 Lock Nut 1/4-20 U Bracket Bolt Bolts (Mounted in the garage door opener) Cover Protection Bolt Hole Lock Nut 10 Assembly STEP3 Install the Idler Pulley 1. Lay the belt beside the rail, as shown. Grasp the end with the hooked trolley connector and pass approximately 12 (30 cm) of belt through the window. Keep the ribbed side toward the rail, and allow it to hang until Assembly Step 4. Remove the tape from the idler pulley. The inside center should be pre-greased. If dry, regrease to ensure proper operation. 2. 3. Place the idler pulley into the window as shown. 4. Insert the idler bolt from the top through the rail and pulley. Tighten with a 3/8 lock washer and nut underneath the rail until the lock washer is compressed. 5. Rotate the pulley to be sure it spins freely. 6. Locate the rail tab. The rail tab is between the idler bolt and the trolley in the front rail section. Use a flathead screwdriver and lift the rail tab until the tab is vertical (90). HARDWARE Nut 3/8"
Lock Washer 3/8"
Bolt Rail Tab Belt Bolt Rail Grease Inside Pulley Idler Pulley Trolley Connector Lock Washer Nut 11 Assembly STEP4Install theBelt 1. 2. Hook the trolley connector into the retaining slot on the trolley as shown (Figure 1). 3. With the trolley against the screwdriver, dispense the remainder of the belt along the rail length Pull the belt around the idler pulley and toward the trolley. The ribbed side must contact the pulley. 4. toward the motor unit and around the sprocket (Figure 2). The sprocket teeth must engage the belt. Check to make sure the belt is not twisted. Connect the trolley threaded shaft with the master link
(Figure 3). a. Push pins of master link bar through holes in end of belt and trolley threaded shaft. b. Push master link cap over pins and past pin notches. c. Slide the closed end of the clip-on spring over one of the pins. Push the open end of the clip-on spring onto the other pin. 5. 6. Remove the spring trolley nut from the threaded shaft. Insert the trolley threaded shaft through the hole in the trolley. Threaded Shaft with Spring Trolley Nut HARDWARE Master Link Figure 1 Trolley Connector Figure 2 Sprocket Retaining Slot Master Link Threaded Shaft Figure 3 12 Assembly STEP 5 Tighten the Belt 1. 2. 3. By hand, thread the spring trolley nut on the threaded shaft until it is finger tight against the trolley. Do not use any tools. Remove the screwdriver. Insert a flathead screwdriver tip into one of the nut ring slots and brace it firmly against the trolley. Tighten the spring trolley nut with an adjustable wrench or a 7/16" open end wrench about a quarter turn until the spring releases and snaps the nut ring against the trolley. This sets the spring to optimum belt tension. STEP 6 Install the Sprocket Cover To avoid possible SERIOUS INJURY to finger from moving garage door opener:
l l ALWAYS keep hand clear of sprocket while operating opener. Securely attach sprocket cover BEFORE operating. Nut Ring Slot Spring Trolley Nut 1. Position the sprocket cover over the sprocket as shown and fasten to the mounting plate with #8x3/8"
hexscrews provided. Youhavenowfinishedassemblingyourgaragedooropener.Pleasereadthefollowingwarningsbefore
proceeding to the installation section. HARDWARE Hex Screw #8x3/8
(Packed with the sprocket cover) Hex Screw Sprocket Cover Nut Ring Nut Ring BEFORE 1 (2.5 cm) AFTER 1-1/4 (3.18 cm) 13 Installation IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ToreducetheriskofSEVEREINJURYorDEATH:
1. READ AND FOLLOW ALL INSTALLATION WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS. 2. Install garage door opener ONLY on properly balanced and lubricated garage door. An improperly balanced door may NOT reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 3. ALL repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware MUST be made by atrained door systems technician BEFORE installing opener. Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to garage door BEFORE installing opener to avoid entanglement. 4. 5. Where possible, install thedoor opener 7 feet (2.13 m) or more above the floor. 6. Mount the emergency release within reach, but at least 6 feet (1.83 m) above the floor and avoiding contact with vehicles to avoid accidental release. 7. NEVER connect garage door opener to power source until instructed to do so. 8. NEVER wear watches, rings or loose clothing while installing or servicing opener. They could be caught in garagedoor or opener mechanisms. 9. Install wall-mounted garage door control:
l within sight of the garage door. l l out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface. away from ALL moving parts of the door. 10. Place entrapment warning label on wall next to garage door control in a prominent location. 11. Place emergency release/safety reverse test label in plain view on inside of garage door. 12. Upon completion of installation, test safety reversal system. Door MUST reverse on contact with a 1-1/2
(3.8 cm) high object (or a 2x4 laid flat) on thefloor. DO NOT install on aone-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. 13. 14.SAVETHESEINSTRUCTIONS. 14 Installation STEP 1 Determine the Header Bracket Location Header Wall Vertical Centerline of Garage Door OPTIONAL CEILING MOUNT FOR HEADER BRACKET To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
l l l l Header bracket MUST be RIGIDLY fastened to structural support on header wall or ceiling, otherwise garage door might NOT reverse when required. DO NOT install header bracket over drywall. Concrete anchors MUST be used if mounting header bracket or 2x4 into masonry. NEVER try to loosen, move or adjust garage door, springs, cables, pulleys, brackets, or their hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension. ALWAYS call a trained door systems technician if garage door binds, sticks, or is out of balance. An unbalanced garage door might NOT reverse when required. Level
(Optional) 2x4 Structural Supports Unfinished Ceiling 2x4 Installation procedures vary according to garage door types. Follow the instructions which apply to your door. 1. Close the door and mark the inside vertical centerline of the garage door. 2. Extend the line onto the header wall above the door. You can fasten the header bracket within 4 feet
(1.22m) of the left or right of the door center only if a torsion spring or center bearing plate is in the way;
or you can attach it to the ceiling (see page 16) when clearance is minimal. (It may be mounted on the wall upside down, if necessary, to gain approximately 1/2(1 cm). If you need to install the header bracket on a 2x4 (onwall or ceiling), use lag screws (not provided) to securely fasten the 2x4 to structural supports as shown here and on page 16. Open your door to the highest point of travel as shown. Draw an intersecting horizontal line on the header wall 2(5 cm) above the highpoint:
3. l 2 (5 cm) above the high point for sectional door and one-piece door with track. l 8 (20 cm) above the high point for one-piece door without track. This height will provide travel clearance for the top edge of the door. NOTE: If the total number of inches exceeds the height available in your garage, use the maximum height possible, or refer to page 16 for ceiling installation. Sectional door with curved track One-piece door with horizontal track Header Wall 2 (5 cm) Track Highest Point of Travel Door One-piece door without track:
jamb hardware Header Wall 8 (20 cm) Highest Point of Travel Door Jamb Hardware Header Wall 2 (5 cm) Door Track Highest Point of Travel One-piece door without track:
pivot hardware Header Wall 8 (20 cm) Door Highest Point of Travel Pivot 15 Installation STEP 2 Install the Header Bracket You can attach the header bracket either to the wall above the garage door, or to the ceiling. Follow the instructions which will work best for your particular requirements. Do not install the header bracket over drywall.Ifinstallingintomasonry,useconcreteanchors(notprovided). HARDWARE Lag Screw 5/16-9x1-5/8 OPTION A - WALL INSTALLATION Center the bracket on the vertical center line with the bottom edge of the bracket on the horizontal line as shown (with the arrow pointing toward the ceiling). Mark the vertical set of bracket holes. Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten the bracket securely to a structuralsupport with the hardware provided. OPTION B - CEILING INSTALLATION Extend the vertical centerline onto the ceiling as shown. Center the bracket on the vertical mark, no more than 6 (15 cm) from the wall. Make sure the arrow is pointing away from the wall. The bracket can be mounted flush against the ceiling when clearance is minimal. Mark the side holes. Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten bracket securely to a structural support with the hardware provided. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Header Wall Header Bracket WALL INSTALLATION Wall Mounting Holes 2x4 Structural Support UP Horizontal Line Optional Mounting Holes Highest Pointof GarageDoor Travel CEILING INSTALLATION Ceiling Mounting Holes UP Header Bracket 6 (15 cm) Maximum Door Spring Garage Door 16 Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Lag Screw Door Spring Garage Door Finished Ceiling Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Lag Screw Header Wall Installation STEP 3 Attach the Rail to the Header Bracket 1. Position the opener on the garage floor below the header bracket. Use packing material as a protective base. NOTE:I f the door spring is in the way, you will need help. Have someone hold the opener securely on a temporary support to allow the rail to clear the spring. Position the rail bracket against the header bracket. Align the bracket holes and join with a clevis pin as shown. Insert a ring fastener to secure. 2. 3. 4. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/2 Clevis Pin Ring Fastener Ring Fastener STEP 4 Position the Garage Door Opener To prevent damage to garage door, rest garage door opener rail on 2x4 placed on top section of door. 1. 2. Remove the packing material and lift the garage door opener onto a ladder. Fully open the door and place a 2x4 (laid flat) under the rail. For one-piece doors without tracks, lay the 2x4on its side. NOTE: A 2x4 is ideal for setting the distance between the rail and the door. If the ladder is not tall enough you will need help at this point. If the door hits the trolley when it is raised, pull the trolley release arm down to disconnect the inner and outer trolley. Slide the outer trolley toward the garage door opener. The trolley can remain disconnected until instructed. Connected Disconnected 2x4 2x4 One-piece door without tracks All other door types 17 Installation STEP 5 Hang the Garage Door Opener To avoid possible SERIOUS INJURY from a falling garage door opener, fasten it SECURELY to structural supports of the garage. Concrete anchors MUST be used if installing ANY brackets into masonry. Hanging the garage door opener will vary depending on your garage. Below are three example installations. Your installation may be different. For ALL installations the garage door opener MUST be connected to structural supports. The instructions illustrate one of the examples below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. On finished ceilings, use the lag screws to attach a support bracket (not provided) to the structural supports before installing the garage door opener. Make sure the garage door opener is aligned with the header bracket. Measure the distance from each side of the garage door opener to the support bracket. Cut both pieces of the hanging bracket (not provided) to required lengths. Attach the end of each hanging bracket to the support bracket with appropriate hardware (not provided). Attach the garage door opener to the hanging brackets with the hex bolts, lock washers, and nuts. Remove the 2x4 and manually close the door. If the door hits the rail, raise the header bracket. EXAMPLES Hidden Supports HARDWARE Lag Screw 5/16-9x1-5/8 Nut 5/16-18 Hex Bolt 5/16- 18x7/8 Lock Washer 5/16-18 Structural Supports Finished Ceiling Unfinished Ceiling 1 Finished Ceiling 2 Not Provided 3 Not Provided Lag Screw Lag Screw 4 Not Provided 18 6 5 Hex Bolt Lock Washer Nut Installation STEP 6 Install the Light Bulbs STEP 7 Attach the Emergency Release Rope and Handle To prevent possible OVER HEATING of the end panel or light socket:
l Use ONLY A19 light bulbs. l DO NOT use incandescent bulbs larger than 100W. l DO NOT use compact fluorescent light bulbs larger than 26W (100W equivalent). l DO NOT use halogen bulbs. l DO NOT use short neck or specialty light bulbs. LED bulbs may cause remote control radio interference. Use ONLY LED bulbs recommended here:
chamberlain.com/bulb. 1. 2. 3. Pull light lens down. Insert light bulb. Closelight lens. or or or To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a falling garage door:
l If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly. l NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage door way is clear of persons and obstructions. l NEVER use handle to pull door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. 1. 2. Insert one end of the emergency release rope through the handle. Make sure that NOTICE is right sideup. Secure with an overhand knot at least 1 (2.5 cm) from the end of the rope to prevent slipping. Insert the other end of the emergency release rope through the hole in the trolley release arm. Mount the emergency release within reach, but at least 6 feet (1.83 m) above floor, avoiding contact with vehicles to prevent accidental release and secure with an overhand knot. NOTE: If it is necessary tocut the emergency release rope, seal thecut end with a match or lighter to prevent unraveling. Ensure the emergency release rope and handle are above the top of all vehicles toavoid entanglement. 19 HARDWARE Self-Threading Screw 1/4-14x5/8 Horizontal Reinforcement Vertical Reinforcement Installation STEP 8 Install the Door Bracket Fiberglass, aluminum or light weight steel garage doors WILL REQUIRE reinforcement BEFORE installation of door bracket. Contact the garage door manufacturer or installing dealer for opener reinforcement instructions or reinforcement kit. Failure to reinforce the top section as required according to the door manufacturer may void thedoor warranty. A horizontal and vertical reinforcement is needed for light weight garage doors (fiber glass, aluminum, steel, doors with glass panel, etc.) (not provided). A horizontal reinforcement brace should belong enough to be secured to two or three vertical supports. A vertical reinforcement brace should cover the height of the top panel. Contact the garage door manufacturer or installing dealer for opener reinforcement instructions or reinforcement kit. NOTE:Many door reinforcement kits providefor direct attachment of the clevis pin and door arm. In this case youwill not need thedoor bracket; proceed tothenext step. OPTIONA- SECTIONALDOORS 1. 2. Center the door bracket on the previously marked vertical center line used for the header bracket installation. Note correct UP placement, as stamped inside bracket. Position the top edge of the bracket 2-4 (5-10 cm) below the top edge of the door, OR directly below any structural support across the top of the door. FIGURE 1 3. Mark, drill holes and install as follows, depending on your doors construction. Metal or light weight doors using a vertical angle iron brace in the door panel support and the door bracket:
l Drill 3/16 fastening holes. Secure the door bracket using the two 1/4-14x5/8 self-threading screws.
(Figure 1) Alternately, use two 5/16-18x2 bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided). (Figure 2) l Metal,insulatedorlightweightfactoryreinforceddoors:
l Drill 3/16 fastening holes. Secure the door bracket using the self-threading screws. (Figure 3) Wood doors:
l Use top and bottom or side to side door bracket holes. Drill 5/16 holes through the door and secure bracket with 5/16-18x2 carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided). (Figure 4) NOTE:The1/4-14x5/8 self-threading screws arenot intended for useon wood doors. Door Bracket Self-Threading Screw FIGURE 3 Vertical Reinforcement Vertical Centerlineof Garage Door UP Vertical Centerline of Garage Door UP FIGURE 2 Vertical Reinforcement Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Door Bracket UP Inside Edge of Door or Reinforcement Board UP Hardware
(not provided) FIGURE 4 Hardware
(not provided) Self-Threading Screw Vertical Centerline of Garage Door 20 Installation STEP 8 Install the Door Bracket (continued) OPTION B- ONE-PIECE DOORS 1. Center the door bracket on the top of the door, in line with the header bracket as shown. 2. Mark either the left and right, or the top and bottom holes. Metal Doors:
l Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten the bracket with the self-threading screws provided. Wood Doors:
l Drill 5/16 holes and use 5/16-18x2 carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided) or 5/16x1-
1/2lag screws (not provided) depending on your installation needs. NOTE: The door bracket may be installed on the top edge of the door if required for your installation. (Refer to thedotted line optional placement drawing.) Header Wall Header Bracket 2x4 Support
(Finished Ceiling) Door Bracket Optional Placement of Door Bracket Vertical Centerline of Garage Door For a door with no exposed framing, or for the optional installation, use lag screws 5/16x1-1/2 (not provided) to fasten the door bracket. Metal Door Self-Threading Screw Wood Door Door Bracket Top of Door
(Inside Garage) Door Bracket Top Edge of Door Optional Placement Hardware
(not provided) Top of Door
(Inside Garage) Top Edge of Door Optional Placement Hardware
(not provided) 21 Installation STEP 9 Connect the Door Arm to the Trolley Installation will vary according to the garage door type. Follow the instructions which apply to your door. OPTION A - SECTIONAL DOORS IMPORTANT: The groove on the straight door arm MUST face away from the curved door arm. Close the door. Disconnect the trolley by pulling the emergency release handle. Attach the straight door arm to the outer trolley using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Attach the curved door arm to the door bracket using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Bring arm sections together. Find two pairs of holes that line up and join sections. Select holes as far apart as possible to increase door arm rigidity and attach using the bolts, nuts, and lock washers. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener until the trolley release arm is horizontal. The trolley will re-engage automatically when the garage door opener is activated. NOTE: If the holes in the curved door arm and the straight door arm do not align, reverse the straight door arm, select two holes (as far apart as possible) and attach using bolts, nuts, and lock washers. If the straight door arm is hanging down too far, you may cut 6 (15 cm) from the solid end. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 Ring Fastener Lock Washer 5/16-18 Nut 5/16-18 Ring Fastener Lock Washer Nut Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt Cut If Needed Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Straight Door Arm
(Groove facing out) Curved Door Arm 22 Installation 1. 2. STEP 9 Connect the Door Arm to the Trolley (continued) OPTION B- ONE-PIECE DOORS IMPORTANT: The groove on the straight door arm MUST face away from the curved door arm. Close the door. Disconnect the trolley by pulling the emergency release handle. Fasten the straight door armand the curved door arm together to the longest possible length (with a 2 or 3 hole overlap) using the bolts, nuts, and lock washers. Attach the straight door arm to the door bracket using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Attach the curved door arm to the trolley using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Pull the emergency release handle to ward the garage door opener until the trolley release arm is horizontal. 3. 4. 5. Straight Door Arm
(Groove facing out) Curved Door Arm HARDWARE One-Piece Door without Track Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 Ring Fastener Ring Fastener Nut Lock Washer Ring Fastener Lock Washer 5/16 -18 Nut 5/16-18 Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Hex Bolts One-Piece Door with Track Ring Fastener Ring Fastener Nut Lock Washer Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Hex Bolts 23 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 1.Strip 1/4 (6 mm) of insulation from one end of the wire and separate the wires. 2. Connect one wire to each of the two screws on the back of the door control. The wires can be connected to either screw. 3.Mount the door control with the hardware provided. 1 2 3 1/4 (6 mm) Installation STEP 10 Install the Door Control PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution:
l l Be sure power is NOT connected BEFORE installing door control. Connect door control ONLY to12 VOLT low voltage wires. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a closing garage door:
l Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. l l NEVER permit children to operateor play with door control push buttons or remote control transmitters. Activate door ONLY when it can be seen clearly, is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight until completely closed. NEVER permit anyone to cross path of closing garage door. l INTRODUCTION Install the door control within sight of the door at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, where small children cannot reach, and away from the moving parts of the door. NOTE: Your product may look different than the illustrations. HARDWARE Screw 6ABx1-1/2 (2) Drywall Anchors (2) 24 Installation MOTION DETECTING AND MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution:
l l Besure power is NOT connected BEFORE installing door control. Connect door control ONLY to12 VOLT low voltage wires. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a closing garage door:
l l l l Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. NEVER permit children to operate or play with door control push buttons or remote control transmitters. Activate door ONLY when it can be seen clearly, is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight until completely closed. NEVER permit anyone to cross path of closing garage door. INTRODUCTION Older Chamberlain door controls and third party products are not compatible. Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. For gang box installations it is not necessary to drill holes or install the drywall anchors. Use the existing holes in the gang box. NOTE: Your product may lookdifferent than the illustrations. Screw 6-32x1 (2) HARDWARE Screw 6ABx1 (2) Drywall Anchors (2) 1. Strip 7/16 (11 mm) of insulation from one end of the wire and separate the wires. 2. Connect one wire to each of the two screws on the back of the door control. The wires can be connected to either screw. If your garage is pre-wired for the door control choose any two wires to connect, note which wires are used so the correct wires are connected to the garage door opener in a later step. 3. Mark the location of the bottom mounting hole and drill a 5/32 hole. 4. Install the bottom screw, allowing 1/8 (3 mm) to protrude from the wall. 5. Position the bottom hole of the door control over the screw and slide down into place. 6. Lift the push bar up and mark the top hole. 7. Remove the door control from the wall and drill a5/32 hole for the top screw. 8. Position the bottom hole of the door control over the screw and slide down into place. Attach the top screw. 1 2 7/16 (11 mm) 3 Wall 4-5 DRYWALL GANG BOX 6 Drywall Anchor 6-32x1 6ABx1 7 8 25 DRYWALL GANG BOX Drywall Anchor 6-32x1 6ABx1 Installation STEP 11 Wire the Door Control to the Garage Door Opener 1. Run the white and red/white wire from the door control to the garage door opener. Attach the wire to thewall and ceiling with the staple (not applicablefor gang box or pre-wired installations). Do not pierce the wire with the stapleas this may cause a short or an open circuit. Strip 7/16 (11 mm) of insulation from the end of the wirenear the garagedoor opener. Connect the wire to the red and white terminals on the garage door opener. If your garage is pre-wired make sure you use the same wires that are connected to the door control. To insert or release wires from the terminal, push in the tab with screw driver tip. STEP 12 Attach the Warning Labels 1. 2. Attach the entrapment warning label on the wall near the door control with tacks or staples. Attach the manual release/safety reverse test label in a visible location on the inside of the garage door. 2. 3. 1 3 HARDWARE Insulated Staple (Not Shown) 2 7/16 (11 mm) Staple D E R I E T H W 26 Installation STEP 13 Install the Protector System Be sure power is NOT connected to the garage door opener BEFORE installing the safety reversing sensor. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from closing garage door:
l l Correctly connect and align the safety reversing sensor. This required safety device MUST NOT be disabled. Install the safety reversing sensor so beam is NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above garage floor. IMPORTANT: The safety reversing sensors MUST be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. The Protector System includes two safety reversing sensors which use a light beam to prevent the garage door from closing. The sending sensor (amber LED) transmits the beam to the receiving sensor (green LED) when both are powered and aligned. The receiving sensor has a sticker on the back. If an obstruction breaks the light beam while the door is closing, the door will stop, and reverse to the full open position. Wheninstallingthesafetyreversingsensors,check:
Sensors are installed INSIDE the garage. Sensor lenses are facing each other. IMPORTANT: Do not allow direct sunlight to the receiving sensor (green LED). Sensor beam is NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above the floor and the light beam is unobstructed. l l l Safety Reversing Sensor Light Beam Protection Area Safety Reversing Sensor Hex Screw 10-24 (2) HARDWARE Wing Nut (2) The safety reversing sensors are designed to clip onto the door track with the provided sensor brackets. If the door track will not support the sensor bracket a wall installation is recommended. The sensor beam should be NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above the floor. DOOR TRACK INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. Slide the curved arms of the sensor bracket around the edge of the door track. Snap into place so that the sensor bracket is flush against the track. Slide the hex screw through the sensor. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite door track. Both lenses must face each other. Door track Garage door 3 Wing nut 6 (15 cm) max. 1 2 27 Installation STEP 13 Install the Protector System (continued) WALL OPTION Make sure the brackets on each side are clear of the door track and have the same amount of clearance so the sensors will align correctly. If additional clearance is needed, use extension brackets 041A5281-1 (not provided) or wood blocks. 1. 2. 3. Attach the sensor bracket against the wall with two lag screws (not provided). Slide the hex screw through the sensor. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite side of the garage door. Both lenses must face each other. 1 Door track Inside garage wall Not provided 2 3 OPTIONAL OR Wing Nut 6 (15 cm) max. FLOOR OPTION 1. 2. 3. 4. Measure the position of both sensor brackets so they will be the same distance from the wall and unobstructed. Attach the bracket to the floor with concrete anchors (not provided). Slide the hex screw through the sensor. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite side of the garage door. Both lenses must face each other. Inside garage wall 2 Not provided Door track 4 Wingnut 6 (15 cm) max. 1 3 28 Installation STEP 14 Wire the Safety Reversing Sensors If your garage has pre-installed wiring for the safety reversing sensors, see OPTION B- PRE-WIRED INSTALLATION page 30. OPTION A- INSTALLATION WITH NO PRE-WIRING 1. 2. 3. Run the wire from both sensors to the garage door opener. Attach with staples, but DO NOT puncture the wire. Separate the sensor wires and strip insulation from each end. Twist the two white wires together. Then twist the two white/black wires together. Using a screwdriver, push in the terminal tabs, and insert the white wires into the white terminal. Insert the white/black wires into the grey terminal. HARDWARE Insulated Staple (Not Shown) 2 Staple 7/16 (11 mm) 1 3 29 Installation STEP 14 Wire the Safety Reversing Sensors (continued) OPTION B- PRE-WIRED INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Cut the sensor wires, making sure there is enough wire to reach the pre-installed wires from the wall. Separate the sensor wires and strip insulation from each end. Choose two of the pre-installed wires and strip insulation from each end. Choose the same color pre-installed wires for each sensor. Connect the pre-installed wires to the sensor wires with wire nuts making sure the colors correspond for each sensor. At the garage door opener, strip the end of the wires previously connected to the sensors. Twist the like-colored wires together. 5. Using a screwdriver, push in the terminal tabs, and insert the wirecolor connected to the sensors white wire into the white terminal. Insert the other wire color connected to the sensors white/black wire into the grey terminal. 1 3 Safety reversing sensor wires Safety reversing sensor wires White White/Black 2 Pre-installed wires 7/16 (11 mm) Wire nuts (not provided) Pre-installed wires Yellow (for example) Purple (for example) Purple Yellow 4 Pre-installed wires 5 Yellow Purple 7/16 (11 mm) 30 Installation STEP 15 Connect Power THEREARETWOOPTIONSFORCONNECTINGPOWER:
OPTIONA- TYPICALWIRING Plug in the garage door opener into a grounded outlet. 1. 2. DO NOT run garage door opener at this time. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution or fire:
l l l Be sure power is NOT connected to the opener, and disconnect power to circuit BEFORE removing cover to establish permanent wiring connection. Garage door installation and wiring MUST be in compliance with ALL local electrical and building codes. NEVER use an extension cord, 2-wire adapter, or change plug in ANY way to make it fit outlet. Besure the opener is grounded. Toavoidinstallationdifficulties,donotruntheopeneratthistime.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, your garage door opener has a grounding type plug with a third grounding pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type outlet. If the plug doesnt fit into the outlet you have, contact aqualified electrician to install the proper outlet. OPTION B- PERMANENTWIRING Ifpermanentwiringisrequiredbyyourlocalcode,refertothefollowingprocedure.Tomakeapermanent
connectionthroughthe7/8-inchholeinthetopofthemotorunit(accordingtolocalcode):
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the motor unit cover screws and set the cover aside. Remove the attached 3-prong cord. Connect the black (line) wire to the screw on the brass terminal; the white (neutral) wire to the screw on the silver terminal; and the ground wire to the green ground screw. The opener must be grounded. Re install the cover. Ground Tab Green Ground Screw Black Wire Ground Wire White Wire 31 Installation STEP 16 Align the Safety Reversing Sensors IMPORTANT: The safety reversing sensors MUST be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. When the garage door opener has power, check the safety reversing sensors. If the sensors are aligned and wired correctly, both LEDs will glow steadily. SAFETY SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTING IfeitherofthesensorLEDsareoff,thereisnopowertothesensor:
1. 2. 3. Check that you have power to the garage door opener. Check the sensor wire is not shorted or broken. Check that the sensors are wired correctly; white wires to white terminal and white/black wires to grey terminal. 1 2 3 Light Beam Protection Area Sending sensor - amber LED Loosen the wing nuts. To align the safety reversing sensors:
1. 2. Adjust the sensors up or down until both LEDs glow steady indicating alignment. 3. Tighten the wing nut to secure the sensor. Receiving sensor - green LED The receiving sensor has a sticker on the back. D E R I E T H W Y E R G IfthegreenreceivingsensorLEDisblinking,thesensorsareobstructedormisaligned:
1. Check for obstructions in the sensor light beam. 2. Align the sensors. 3. If the receiving sensor (green LED) faces direct sunlight, switch the receiving sensor with the sending sensor and repeat STEP 12 Install the Protector System page 27 to assure proper operation. STEP 17 Ensure the Door Control is Wired Correctly If the door control has been installed and wired correctly, the command LED on the control panel will blink or the LED behind the push button will blink if installed correctly. Wing nut 32 Adjustments Introduction ONE-PIECE DOORS ONLY When setting the UP travel for a one-piece door ensure that the door does not slant backwards when fully open (UP). If the door is slanted backwards this will cause unnecessary bucking and/or jerking when the door is opening or closing. Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. l Incorrect adjustment of garage door travel limits will interfere with proper operation of safety reversal system. l After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse oncontact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on floor. Correct Incorrect To prevent damage to vehicles, be sure fully open door provides adequate clearance. Your garage door opener is designed with electronic controls to make setup and adjustments easy. PROGRAMMING BUTTONS The programming buttons are located on the left side panel of the garage door opener and are used to program the travel. While programming, the UP and DOWN buttons can be used to move the door as needed. UP (Open) DOWN (Close) 33 Adjustment 1- Program the Travel Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. l l Incorrect adjustment of garage door travel limits will interfere with proper operation of safety reversal system. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) highobject (or 2x4 laid flat) on floor. While programming the travel, the UP and DOWN buttons can be used to move the door as needed. The Safety Reversing Sensors will be disconnected during the Program the Travel process.During the Automatic Force Setup the door will automatically open and close. 2 - Automatic Force Set Up Once both the up and down positions have been manually set, the Safety Reversing Sensors will reconnect and become operational. Then, the opener will enter a force-sensing operation by automatically moving the door open and close. The garage door opener will sound an audible and visual alert before automatically opening and closing the door. The garage door opener will beep three times, confirming that the Automatic Force Setup completed successfully. Adjustment is complete. If you hear one long beep after the door attempts to move, then the Automatic Force Set Up has not completed successfully. Please start over at step 1 of Program the Travel. 1 Press and hold the Adjustment Button until the UP Button begins to flash and/or a beep is heard. The Safety Reversing Sensors will be disconnected during the Program the Travel process. 3 Once the door is in the desired UP position press and release the Adjustment Button. The garage door opener lights will flash twice and the DOWN Button will begin to flash. 2 Press and hold the UP Button until the door is in the desired UP position. 4 Press and hold the DOWN button until the door is in the desired DOWN position. 5 Once the door is in the desired DOWN position press and release the Adjustment Button. The garage door opener lights will flash twice. Program the Travel is now complete. If the garage door opener lights flash 5 times, then programming has timed out and the Travel Limits have not been set. Please restart the Program the Travel process. 34 Adjustments 3 - Test the Safety Reversal System Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons
(particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. Safety reversal system MUST be tested every month. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2
(3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. 1 With the door fully open, place a 1-1/2 inch (3.8 cm) board (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor, centered under the garage door. 2 Press the remote control push button to close the door. The door MUST reverse when it makes contact with the board. 4 - Test the Protector System Without a properly installed safety reversing sensor, persons
(particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. 1 Open the door. Place an obstruction in the path of the door. 2 Press the remote control push button to close the door. The door will not move more than an inch (2.5 cm). If the door stops but does not reverse:
1. Repeat Program the Travel (see Adjustment Step 1);
2. Repeat the Safety Reversal test. If the test continues to fail, call a trained door systems technician. The garage door opener will not close from a remote control if the LED in either safety reversing sensor is off (alerting you to the fact that the sensor is misaligned or obstructed). If the garage door opener closes the door when the safety reversing sensor is obstructed (and the sensors are no more than 6 inches [15 cm] above thefloor), call for a trained door systems technician. 35 Battery Backup Install the Battery MODEL B2210T, B2211T, B2212T, and B2215T To reduce the risk of FIRE or INJURY to persons:
l Disconnect ALL electric and battery power BEFORE performing ANY service or maintenance. l Use ONLY Chamberlain part # G4228 for replacement battery. l DO NOT dispose of battery in fire. Battery may explode. Check with local codes for disposal instructions. ALWAYS wear protective gloves and eye protection when changing the battery or working around the battery compartment. The 12V battery backup allows access in and out of your garage, even when the power is out. The battery does not have to be fully charged to operate the garage door opener. When the garage door opener is operating on battery power, it may run slower and the following features are disabled:
l Garage door opener lights l myQ App control and monitoring l Unattended close including Timer-to-Close Battery Status LED 1. Unplug the garage door opener. 2. Open the light lens on the right side panel of the garage door opener. Use a Phillips head screwdriver to remove the battery cover on the garage door opener. Partially insert the battery into the battery compartment with the terminals facing out. Connect red (+) and black (-) wires from the garage door opener to the corresponding terminals on the battery. 3. 4. 5. Replace the battery cover. 6. 7. Plug in the garage door opener. Wait for the green Battery Status LED to start flashing before proceeding to test the battery. Test the Battery Depending on the power level, the battery may need to charge before performing the test. The garage door opener must be unplugged to test the battery. 1. 2. Open and close the door using the remote control or door control. While the motor is on, the battery status LED will either glow solid orange indicating opener is operating on battery power or will flash indicating low battery power. NOTE: The garage door opener may run slower if the battery is not fully charged. Plug in the garage door opener. Verify the battery status LED is flashing green, indicating the battery is charging. Charge the Battery The battery charges when the garage door opener is plugged into a 120Vac electrical outlet that haspower andrequires 24 hours to fully charge. A fully chargedbattery supplies12Vdc to the garage door opener for up to 24 hours of normal operation during an electrical power outage. After the electrical power has been restored, the battery will recharge within 24 hours. The battery will last approximately 1 to 2 yearswith normal usage. Instructions for replacement are provided with the battery. To obtainmaximumbattery life and preventdamage, disconnect the battery when the garage door opener is unplugged for an extended period oftime, such as a summer or winter home. Battery Status Greenbattery status LED: All systems are normal. l l A solid green LED light indicates the battery is fully charged. A flashing green LED indicates the battery is being charged. Orange battery status LED: The garage door opener has lost power and is in battery backup mode. l l l Solid orange LED while the motor is on, indicates the garage door opener is operating on battery power. A flashing orange LED while the motor is on, indicates the battery is low. The opener beeps every 2 seconds while operating on battery power. Red battery status LED: The battery needs to be replaced. l A solid red LED indicates the battery will no longer hold a charge. Go to chamberlain.com to purchase a replacement battery to allow your system to operate during a power outage. 36 myQAppControl Connect With Your Smart phone YOUWILLNEED:
l Wi-Fi enabled smartphone, tablet or laptop l Broadband Internet connection l Wi-Fi signal in the garage (2.4GHz,802.11b/g/nrequired), see page 5 l Password for your home network (routers main account, not guest network) l myQ serial number located on the garage door opener DOWNLOAD THE myQ APP TO SET UP AN ACCOUNT AND CONNECT Open and close your door, get alerts and set schedules from anywhere. Connected smart garage door openers also receives of tware updates to ensure the opener has thelatest operational features. The garage door opener must run through a complete cycle before it will activate Wi-Fi programming. 1. 2. Download themyQApp. Set up an account and connect. If you already have the myQ App installed:
1. 2. Check that your mobile device has the latest software. Download the latest version of the myQ App. For more information on connecting your garage door opener, visit support.chamberlaingroup.com. NOTES:
myQ App control WILL NOT work if the garage door opener is operating on battery power. To erase the Wi-Fi settings from the opener, see page 42. Google Playand the Google Playlogo are trademarks of Google LLC. App Store and the Apple and App Store logos are trademarks of Apple Inc. LED An LED on the garage dooropener will indicate Wi-Fi below. status. See table Wi-FiStatus LED Blue Definition Off - Wi-Fiis not turned on. Blinking - Garage door opener is in Wi-Filearn mode. Solid - Mobile device connected to the garage door opener. Blue and Green Blinking - Attempting to connect to router. Green Blinking - Attempting to connect to the Internet server. Solid - Wi-Fihas been set up and garage door opener is connected to the Internet. 37 Operation IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ToreducetheriskofSEVEREINJURYorDEATH:
1. READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS. 2. ALWAYS keep remote controls out of reach of children. NEVER permit children to operate or play with 3. 4. garage door control push buttons or remote controls. ONLY activate garage door when it can be seen clearly, it is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight and away from people and objects until completely closed. NO ONE SHOULD CROSS THE PATH OF THE MOVING DOOR. 5. NO ONE SHOULD GO UNDER A STOPPED, PARTIALLY OPENED DOOR. 6. If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Use caution when using this release with the door open. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly and increasing the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 7. NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. 8. NEVER use handle to pull garage door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Safety reversal system MUST be tested every month. Garage door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2
(3.8 cm) high object (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. Failure to adjust the garage door opener properly increases the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. ALWAYS KEEP GARAGE DOOR PROPERLY BALANCED (see page 5). An improperly balanced door may NOT reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. ALL repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension, MUST be made by a trained door systems technician. ALWAYS disconnect electric and battery power to garage door opener BEFORE making ANY repairs or removing covers. This operator system is equipped with an unattended operation feature. The door could move unexpectedly. NO ONE SHOULD CROSS THE PATH OF THE MOVING DOOR. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. 16. SAVETHESEINSTRUCTIONS. Using your Garage Door Opener The garage door opener can be activated through a wall-mounted door control, remote control, wireless keyless entry or myQ App. When the door is closed and the garage door opener is activated the door will open. If the door makes contact with an obstruction while opening, the door will stop, opener beep sandlights flash5 times. When the door is inany position other than closed and the garage door opener is activated, the door will close. If the garage door makes contact with an obstruction while closing, the door will reverse, opener beeps and lights flash 5 times. However, you can close the door ifyou hold the button on the door control or keyless entry until the dooris fully closed. The safety reversing sensors do not affect the opening cycle. The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. 38 The garage door opener lights will turn on when the opener is initially plugged in, the opener is activated, or power is restored after interruption. The garage door opener lights automatically turn off after a set length of time. To adjust the light settings, see Using your Door Control. Operation Using your Door Control MOTION DETECTING CONTROL PANEL Push Bar LOCK: Prevents remote controls from working, while still allowing activation from the door control and keyless entry. (Factory setting is OFF.) Turn ON: Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The command LED will flash as long as the lock feature is on. Turn OFF: Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The command LED will stop flashing and normal operation will resume. Command LED Motion Sensor Switch LEARN Button LOCK Button LIGHT Button Motion Sensor SYNCHRONIZETHEDOORCONTROL: To synchronize the door control to the garage door opener, press the push bar until the garage door opener activates (it may take up to 3 presses). Test the door control by pressing the push bar; each press of the push bar will activate the garage door opener. PUSHBAR: Press the push bar to open or close the door. LEARN BUTTON: Use to program compatible remote controls, wireless keyless entries and myQ devices to the garage door opener. MOTION SENSOR: Turns the garage door opener lights on when motion is detected. Lights stay on for 4-1/2 minutes
(factory setting), then turn off. Set the motion sensor switch ON or OFF to control this feature. 39 Operation MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL Push Bar Command LED LEARN Button LOCK Button LIGHT Button SYNCHRONIZETHEDOORCONTROL: To synchronize the door control to the garage door opener, press the push bar until the garage door opener activates (it may take up to 3 presses). Test the door control by pressing the push bar; each press of the push bar will activate the garage door opener. PUSHBAR: Press the push bar to open or close the door. LEARN BUTTON: Use to program compatible remote controls, wireless keyless entries and myQ devices to the garage door opener. LOCK: Prevents remote controls from working, while still allowing activation from the door control andkeylessentry. (Factory setting is OFF.) Turn ON:
Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The command LED will flash as long as the lock feature ison. TurnOFF:
Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The command LED will stop flashing and normal operation will resume. PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL Push Button LIGHT Button SYNCHRONIZETHEDOORCONTROL: To synchronize the door control to the garage door opener, press the push button until the garage door opener activates (it may take up to 3 presses). PUSHBUTTON: Press the button to open or close the door. LIGHT/LEARNBUTTON: Press the LIGHT button to turn the garage door opener lights on or off. When the lights are turned on they will stay on until the LIGHT button is pressed again, or until the garage door opener is activated. Once the garage door opener is activated the lights will turn off after the specified period of time (the factory setting is 4-1/2 minutes). The LIGHT button will not control the lights when the door is in motion. 40 Operation RemoteControl and Keyless Entry PRE-PROGRAMMED REMOTE CONTROL INCLUDED, NO NEED TO PROGRAM THE REMOTE. To add or reprogram a remote control, follow the instructions below. Older Chamberlain remote controls are NOT compatible. PROGRAM USING THE MOTION DETECTING OR MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL Press the LEARN button on the door control to enter programming mode. The command LED will flash once. Press the LEARN button again, the command LED will flash once again. Remote control: Press the button on the remote control that you wish to operate your garage door. Keyless entry: Enter a4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press the ENTER button. PROGRAM USING THE PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL Press and hold thelight button and the push button until thepush button LED begins to blink. Remote control: Press the button on the remote control that you wish to operate your garage door. Keyless entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press the ENTER button. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. PROGRAM USING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER LEARN BUTTON 1. 2. Locate the LEARN Button. Press and immediately release the LEARN button. The LEARN LED will glow steady for 30 seconds. Within 30 seconds... 3. Remote Control: Press and hold the button on the remote control that you wish to use. Keyless Entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press and hold the ENTER button. Release the button when the garage door opener lights blink or two clicks are heard. 1-2 3 LEARN Button LEARN LED c l i c k c l i c k Push Button LIGHT Button OR PIN HomeLink If your vehicleis equipped with HomeLink, a Compatibility Bridge (not included) may be necessary for certain vehicles. Visit bridge.chamberlain.com to find out if a Bridge is needed. OR OR The garage door opener lights will flash (or two clicks will be heard) when thecodehas been programmed. Repeat the steps for programming additional remote controls or keyless entry devices. If programming is unsuc-
cessful, repeat the steps using the LEARN button on the garage door opener.
PIN 41 Operation Erase the Memory ERASE ALL REMOTE CONTROLS AND KEYLESS ENTRIES 1. Press and hold the LEARN button on garage door opener until the learn LED goes out (approximately 6seconds). All remote control and keyless entry codes are now erased. Reprogram any accessory you wish to use. ERASE ALL DEVICES INCLUDING myQ ENABLED ACCESSORIES 1. 2. Press and hold the LEARN button on garage door opener until the learn LED goes out (approximately 6 seconds). Immediately press and hold the LEARN button again until the learn LED goes out. All codes arenow erased. Reprogram any accessory you wish to use. ERASE THE CONNECTION FROM GARAGE DOOR OPENER TO HOME Wi-Fi NETWORK 1. Press and hold the black adjustment button on thegarage door opener until 3 beeps are heard
(Approximately 6 seconds). LEARN Button 1. 2. Black Adjustment Button To Open the Door Manually To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a falling garage door:
l If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly. l NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. l NEVER use handle to pull door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. DISCONNECT THE TROLLEY The door should be fully closed if possible. Pull down on the emergency release handle so the trolley release arm snaps to the vertical position. The door can now be raised and lowered as often as necessary. TO RE-CONNECT THE TROLLEY 1. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener so the trolley release arm snaps to the horizontal position. The trolley will reconnect on the next UP or DOWN operation, either manually or by using the door control or remote control. 42 NOTICE:This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSSs.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum 20 cm (8 in.) distance is maintained between users/bystanders and device. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada ICES standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
l l l l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Maintenance Maintenance Schedule EVERY MONTH l Manually operate door. If it is unbalanced or binding, call a trained door systems technician. l l Check to be sure door opens and closes fully. Adjust if necessary, see page 33. Test the safety reversal system. Adjust if necessary, see page 35. EVERY YEAR l l Oil door rollers, bearings and hinges. The garage door opener does not require additional lubrication. Do not grease the door tracks. Test the battery backup and consider replacing the battery to ensure the garage door opener will operate during an electrical power outage, see page 36 to test the battery backup. The Remote Control Battery To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
l NEVER allow small children near batteries. l If battery is swallowed, immediately notify doctor. To reduce risk of fire, explosion or chemical burn:
l Replace ONLY with 3V CR2032 coin batteries. l DO NOT recharge, disassemble, heat above 212F (100C) or incinerate. The 3V CR2032 Lithium battery should produce power for up to 3 years. If the battery is low, the remote controls LED will not flash when the button is pressed. To replace battery, pry open the case first in the middle (1), then at each side (2 and 3) with the visor clip. Replace the batteries with only 3V CR2032 coin cell batteries. Insert battery positive side up. Dispose of old batteries properly. 43 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Chart Your garage door opener is programmed with self-diagnostic capabilities. The UP and DOWN arrows on the garage door opener flash the diagnostic codes. DIAGNOSTIC CODE SYMPTOM Flashes Flashes SOLUTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1-5 2 3 1-4 5 6 The garage door opener will not close. Safety reversing sensors are not installed, connected, or wires may be cut. Inspect sensor wires for a disconnectedor cut wire. The garage door opener will not close. There is a shortor reversed wire for the safety reversing sensors. Inspect safety sensor wire at all staple and connection points, replace wire or correct as needed. The door control will not function. The wires for the door control are shorted or the door control is faulty. Inspect door control wires at all staple and connection points,replace wire or correct as needed. The garage door opener will not close. Safety reversing sensors are misaligned or were momentarily obstructed. Realign both sensors until both LEDs are glowing steady. Make sure nothing is hanging or mounted on the door that would interrupt the sensors path while closing. Door moves 6-8 (15-20 cm) stops or reverses. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Checkwiring connections at travel module and at the logic board. Replace travel module if necessary. No movement, only a single click. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Replacelogic board if necessary. Opener hums for 1-2 seconds no movement. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Replacemotor if necessary. Door coasts after it has come to a complete stop. Program travel to coasting position or have door balanced by a trained door systems technician. No movement, or sound. Replace logic board. Unable to set the travel or retain position. Check travel module for proper assembly, replace if necessary. The battery status LED is constantly flashing green. Battery backup charging circuit error, replace the logic board. Door is moving, stops or reverses. Opener beeps and lightsflash. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. If the dooris binding or sticking contact a trained door systems technician. If door is not binding or sticking attempt to reprogram travel, see Program the Travel page 34. Opener runs approximately 6-8 (15-20 cm), stops andre-
verses. The garage door opener will not close. Communication error to travel module. Check travel module connections, replace travel module if necessary. Safety reversingsensorsare misalignedor were momentarily obstructed. Realignbothsensorsto ensure bothLEDsare steady andnotflickering. Make sure nothing is hanging or mounted on the door that would interrupt the sensors path while closing. 44 Wi-Fitroubleshooting The garage door opener will NOT enter Wi-Fi learn mode:
l l After the initial installation of the garage door opener, the garage door opener must complete a full cycle
(open and closed) before the Wi-Filearn mode can be activated. If there has been a recent power outage, the garage door opener must complete a full cycle before the Wi-Fi learn mode can be activated. See page 37 to activate Wi-Fi LEARN mode. If your black adjustment button is not solid green go to support.chamberlaingroup.com. MyvehiclesHomelinkisnotprogrammingtomygaragedooropener:
Compatibility Bridge (not included) may be necessary for certain vehicles. Visitbridge.chamberlain.com to find out ifa Bridge is needed. My neighbors remote control opens my garage door:
Erase the memory fromyour garage door opener and reprogram the remote control(s). Safety sensor LED lights are not lit:
If the sensor LEDs do not glow steadily when the opener is activated, see SAFETY SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTINGpage 32. Troubleshooting Additional Troubleshooting Mygaragedooropenerstops,reverses,beepsandflashesitslights:
l Garage door opener has been activated through a device or feature such as Timer-to-Close or garage door monitor. My remote control will not activate the garage door:
l l l Verify the lock feature is not activated on the door control. Reprogram the remote control. If the remote control will still not activate the door check the diagnostic codes to ensure the garage door opener is working properly. My door will not close:
The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move inthe down direction. l l Check for binding or obstructions anywhere along the track to garage floor. The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. o Verify the safety reversing sensors are properly installed, aligned and free of any obstructions. o If the receiving sensor (green LED) faces direct sunlight, switch the receiving sensor with the sending sensor so the receiving sensor is not in direct sunlight. 45 Warranty Contact Information STOP!
This garage door opener WILL NOT work until the safety reversing sensors are properly installed and aligned. Visit us online at:
support.chamberlaingroup.com The Chamberlain Group, Inc.(Seller) warrants to the first retail purchaser of this product, for the residence in which this product is originally installed, that it is free from defects in materials and/or workmanship for a specific period of time as defined below (the Warranty Period). The warranty period commences from the date of purchase. CHAMBERLAINLIMITED WARRANTY Model B2202 B2210T B2211T B2212T B2215T B2401 B2405 B353 B4505T Parts 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 5 years Motor 6 years 6 years 6 years 6 years 6 years 10 years 10 years 6 years Lifetime WARRANTY PERIOD Accessories 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year Belt 5 years 5 years 5 years 5 years 5 years 15 years 15 years 5 years Lifetime Battery Backup 1 year 1 year 1 year 1 year The proper operation of this product is dependent on your compliance with the instructions regarding installation, operation, and maintenance and testing. Failure to comply strictly with those instructions will void this limited warranty in its entirety. If, during the limited warranty period, this product appears to contain a defect covered by this limited warranty, visit chamberlain.com, before dismantling this product. You will be advised of disassembly and shipping. Then send the product or component, pre-paid and insured, as directed to our service center for warranty repair. Please include a brief description of the problem and a dated proof-of-purchase receipt with any product returned for warranty repair. Products returned to Seller for warranty repair, which upon receipt by Seller are confirmed to be defective and covered by this limited warranty, will be repaired or replaced (at Sellers sole option) at no cost to you and returned pre-paid. Defective parts will be repaired or replaced with new or factory-rebuilt parts at Sellers sole option. [You are responsible for any costs incurred in removing and/or reinstalling the product or any component]. ALLIMPLIEDWARRANTIESFORTHEPRODUCT,INCLUDINGBUTNOTLIMITEDTOANYIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE,ARELIMITEDINDURATIONTOTHE
APPLICABLELIMITEDWARRANTYPERIODSETFORTHABOVEFORTHERELATEDCOMPONENT(S),ANDNOIMPLIEDWARRANTIESWILLEXISTORAPPLYAFTERSUCHPERIOD.SomeStatesandProvincesdonotallowlim-
itationsonhowlonganimpliedwarrantylasts,sotheabovelimitationmaynotapplytoyou.THISLIMITEDWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERNON-DEFECTDAMAGE,DAMAGECAUSEDBYIMPROPERINSTALLATION,OPERATION
ORCARE(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTOABUSE,MISUSE,FAILURETOPROVIDEREASONABLEANDNECESSARYMAINTENANCE,UNAUTHORIZEDREPAIRSORANYALTERATIONSTOTHISPRODUCT),LABORCHARGES
FORREINSTALLINGAREPAIREDORREPLACEDUNIT,REPLACEMENTOFCONSUMABLEITEMS(E.G.,BATTERIESINREMOTECONTROLTRANSMITTERSANDLIGHTBULBS),ORUNITSINSTALLEDFORNON-RESIDENTIAL
USE.THISLIMITEDWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERANYPROBLEMSWITH,ORRELATINGTO,THEGARAGEDOORORGARAGEDOORHARDWARE,INCLUDINGBUTNOTLIMITEDTOTHEDOORSPRINGS,DOORROLLERS,
DOORALIGNMENTORHINGES.THISLIMITEDWARRANTYALSODOESNOTCOVERANYPROBLEMSCAUSEDBYINTERFERENCE.UNDERNOCIRCUMSTANCESSHALLSELLERBELIABLEFORCONSEQUENTIAL,INCIDEN-
TALORSPECIALDAMAGESARISINGINCONNECTIONWITHUSE,ORINABILITYTOUSE,THISPRODUCT.INNOEVENTSHALLSELLERSLIABILITYFORBREACHOFWARRANTY,BREACHOFCONTRACT,NEGLIGENCEOR
STRICTLIABILITYEXCEEDTHECOSTOFTHEPRODUCTCOVEREDHEREBY.NOPERSONISAUTHORIZEDTOASSUMEFORUSANYOTHERLIABILITYINCONNECTIONWITHTHESALEOFTHISPRODUCT.
Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of consequential, incidental or special damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state and province to province. 46 Automatic Garage Door Opener Safety & Maintenance Guide GarageDoor Opener SafetyAnAutomaticDecision Agaragedooristhelargestmovingobjectinthehome.Animproperlyadjustedgaragedoorandopenercanexertdeadlyforcewhenthedoorcloseswhichcouldleadtoentrapmentofchildrenoradultsandsubsequent
injury or death. Proper installation, operation, maintenance, and testing of the garage door and automatic opener are necessary to provide a safe, trouble-free system. Careless operation or allowing children to play with or use garage door opener controls are also dangerous situations that can lead to tragic results. A few simple precautions can protect your family and friends from potential harm. Please review the safety and maintenance tips in this guide carefully and keep it for reference. Check the operation of your garage door and opener to ensure they function in a safe and trouble-free manner. Be sure to read all Important Safety Information found in your garage door openers manual as it provides more details and safety considerations than can be supplied with this guide. Garage Door Openersare Not Toys Discuss garage door and opener safety with your children. Explain the danger of being trapped under the door. Stay away from a moving door.
Thewall-mountedpushbuttonshouldbeoutofreachofchildren, at least 5 feet from the nearest standing surface and away from all moving parts. Mount and use the button where you can clearly see the closing garage door. Keep transmitters and remote controls out of reach of children. Do not let children play with or use transmitters or other remote control devices. Keep the door in sight until it completely closes when using the wall-mounted push button or transmitter. 47 Routine Maintenance Can Prevent Tragedies Make monthly inspection and testing of your garagedoor and opener system a part of your regular routine. Review your owners manual for both the door and door opener. If you dont have the owners manuals, contact the manufacturer(s) and request acopy for your specific model(s). Look for the opener model number on the back of the power unit. WARNINGSPRINGS ARE UNDER HIGH TENSION. ONLY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUALS SHOULD ADJUST THEM. Visually check the door and installation:
Starting with the door in theclosed position, use the manual disconnect on the opener to disconnect the door. Look for signs of wear or damage on hinges, rollers, springs, and door panels. These parts may require periodic lubrication. Check the owners manual for suggested maintenance. If any signs of damage are evident, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. Verify the photoeye height is no higher than 6 from the garage floor. Test the door for proper operation:
Open and close the door manually using handles or suitable gripping points. The door should move freely and without difficulty. Thedoorshouldbalanceandstaypartiallyopen34feetabovethefloor. If you detect any signs of improper operation, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. Test the opener safety features:
Reconnect the opener to the door using the manual disconnect and open the door. Place a 2x4 board flat in the path of thedoor (1) and try to close it (2). The door should stop when it comes in contact with the 2x4 and then reverse direction. Block the photoelectric sensor by waving an object in front of the sensor and attempt to close the door. The door should not close unless the wall-mounted push button is manually held during operation. If the opener does not performas described, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. 2 1 48
1 2 | 114-5745-010 EN Part2 | Users Manual | 675.32 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
Repair Parts Rail Assembly Parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Belt Pulley Master link Rail Trolley assembly: threaded shaft (1), clevis pin (1), and ring (1) U bracket D-shape threaded shaft Spring trolley nut Not shown Wear pads Hardware bag 1 2 8 Part Number 041A5250 144C0054M 004A1008 041A5665 041C5141-2 041D0598-1 041A6689 041B4103 Installation Parts Description Curved door arm Door bracket with clevis pin and fastener Emergency release rope and handle Header bracket with clevis pin and fastener Remote control visor clip Safety sensor bracket 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 Safety sensor kit: receiving and sending sensors with 2-conductor wire 8 9 Straight door arm White and red/white wire 041A7276 10 3V CR2032 lithium battery 041A7920-2 Not shown Installation Manual 1 4 2 7 3 5 6 8 4 3 5 6 7 49 Part Number 041B0035B 041A5047-1 041A2828 041A5047-2 K029B0137 041-0155-000 041-0136-000 4178B0034B 041B4494-1 K010A0020 114-5556-000 9 10 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Models B2202, B2401, B2405, and B353 5 4 3 7 1 2 6 14 12 8 9 13 10 11 11 5 4 50 Description Sprocket cover Gear End Panel with Light Cover Light socket Light Lens Capacitor Capacitor Bracket Travel Module Cover 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Receiver Logic Board 11 Logic Board End Panel 12 Motor with Travel Module 13 Line Cord 14 Terminal Block Not Shown Wire Harness Part Number 041A4371 041A5885-4 041-0037-000 041C0279 K108D0079M 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0024-000 050ACTB 041-0025-000 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7946 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Models B2210T, B2211T, B2212T, B2215T, and B4505T 10 3 4 2 1 6 7 5 9 8 4 8 3 51 Description Sprocket cover Front End Panel Light Lens Light Socket Cover 1 2 3 4 5 6 Motor with Travel Module 7 8 9 Travel Module Logic Board End Panel Logic Board 10 12V Battery Not Shown Wire Harness Transformer Line Cord Terminal Block Part Number 041B5348-2 041A7618 041-0144 041C0279 041-0229-000 041D8006-1 041D8071-4 041D0233-3 050DCTBMC G4228 041D9069 041D0277-1 041B4245 041A3150 114-5745-010 2022, The Chamberlain Group LLC All Rights Reserved Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance Home Link is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation The Chamberlain Group LLC 300 Windsor Drive Oak Brook, IL 60523
1 2 | 114-5748-010 EN-FR Part1 | Users Manual | 4.94 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
www.chamberlain.com Installation Manual Chain Drive Garage Door Opener Models C2405C D2405C C2102C C2202C D2101C FOR RESIDENTIAL USE ONLY PRE PROGRAMMED REMOTE CONTROL INCLUDED To register your garage door opener to receive updates and offers from Chamberlain, visit chamberlain.registria.com or use the icon below:
1. Take a photo of the camera icon including the points (
Send it in by texting the photo to 71403 (US).
). 2. Please read this manual and the enclosed safety materials carefully!
Fasten the manual near the garage door after installation. The door WILL NOT CLOSE unless the Protector System is connected and properly aligned. Periodic checks of the garage door opener are required to ensure safe operation. The model number label is located on the back panel of your garage door opener. This garage door opener is compatible with myQ and Security+ 2.0 accessories. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. Download the myQ App Available on most iOS and Android Devices Available on most iOS and Android Devices Contents Preparation 3 Assembly 7 Installation 11 Install the Door Control . 22 Install the Protector System . 26 Connect Power . 29 Adjustments 31 myQ App Control 34 Connect With Your Smartphone . 34 Operation 38 Using your Garage Door Opener . 35 Using your Door Control . 36 Remote Control and Keyless Entry . 37 Home Link . 37 Erase the Memory . 38 To Open the Door Manually . 38 Maintenance 39 Troubleshooting 40 Warranty 42 Automatic Garage Door Opener Safety & Maintenance Guide 43 Repair Parts 45 Rail Assembly Parts . 45 Installation Parts . 45 Model C2102C . 46 Model C2405C . 47 Model D2405C . 47 Model C2202C . 48 Model D2101C . 49 2 Safety Symbol and Signal Word Review This garage door opener has been designed and tested to offer safe service provided it is installed, operated, maintained and tested in strict accordance with the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Mechanical Electrical When you see these Safety Symbols and Signal Words on the following pages, they will alert you to the possibilityof serious injury or death if you do not comply with the warnings that accompany them. The hazardmay come from something mechanical or from electric shock. Read the warnings carefully. When you see this Signal Word on the following pages, it will alert you to the possibility of damage to your garage door and/or the garage door opener if you do not comply with the cautionary statements that accompany it. Read them carefully. WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer or birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Unattended Operation The Timer-to-Close (TTC) feature, the myQ App, and myQ Garage Door and Gate Monitor are examples of unattended close and are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. Any device or feature that allows the door to close without being in the line of sight of the door is considered unattended close. The Timer-to-Close (TTC) feature, the myQApp, and any other myQ devices are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. The images throughout this manual are for reference only and your product may look different. Before You Connect with Your Smartphone*
Monitor and control your garage door from anywhere using the myQ App. You will need a router with Wi-Fi and a smartphone or other mobile device. Make sure your mobile device is connected to your Wi-Fi network. Hold your mobile device in the place where your garage door opener will be installed and check the Wi-Fi signal strength. Check Signal Strength. If you see:
Wi-Fi signal is strong. Youre all set!
Install your new garage door opener. Wi-Fi signal is weak. The garage door opener will likely connect to your Wi-Fi network. If not, try one of the options below. No Wi-Fi signal. Try one of the following:
Move your router closer to the garage door opener to minimize interference from walls and other objects Buy a Wi-Fi range extender Visit support.chamberlaingroup.com for more details. See myQ App Control page 37 to connect your garage door opener to your Wi-Fi network.
*Smartphone control is not available on models C2102 and D2101. Preparation Preparation Check the Door To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS call a trained door systems technician if garage door binds, sticks, or is out of balance. An unbalanced garage door may NOT reverse when required. NEVER try to loosen, move or adjust garage door, door springs, cables, pulleys, brackets or their hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension. Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to garage door BEFORE installation and operating garage door opener to avoid entanglement. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. To prevent damage to garage door and opener:
ALWAYS disable locks BEFORE installing and operating the opener. ONLY operate garage door opener at 120V, 60 Hz to avoid malfunction and damage. Before you begin:
1. Disable locks and remove any ropes connected to the garage door. 2. Lift the door half way up. Release the door. If balanced, it should stay in place, supported entirely by its springs. Raise and lower the door to check for binding or sticking. If your door binds, sticks, or is out of balance, call a trained door systems technician. Check the seal on the bottom of the door. Any gap between the floor and the bottom of the door must not exceed 1/4 (6 mm). Otherwise, the safety reversal system may not work properly. The opener should be installed above the center of the door. If there is a torsion spring or center bearing plate in the way of the header bracket, it may be installed within 4 feet
(1.2m) to the left or right of the door center. See page 13. 3. 4. 5. Torsion Spring Extension Spring 3 Preparation Tools Needed Additional Items You May Need:
Survey your garage are a to see if you will need any of the following items:
(2)2X4 Pieces of wood : May be used to fasten the header bracket to the structural supports. Also used to position the garage door opener during installation and for testing the safety reversing sensors. Support bracket and fastening hardware: Must be used if you have a finished ceiling in your garage. Support brackets Hardware x2 (each) Hanging brackets 5/32 3/16 5/16 Extension brackets (Model 041A5281-1) or wood blocks: Depending upon garage construction, extension brackets or wood blocks may be needed to install the safety reversing sensor. Lag screws x4 Lag screws x12 1/2 1/4 7/16 9/16 7/16 Extension Brackets 041A5281-1 Wood Blocks Fastening hardware: Alternate floor mounting of the safety reversing sensor will require hardware not provided. Door reinforcement: Required if you have alight weight steel, aluminum, fiber glass or glass panel door. Rail extension kit: Required if your garage door is more than 7 feet (2.13 m) high. 4 Preparation Carton Inventory Save the carton and packing material until the installation and adjustment is complete. Instructions for the accessories will be attached to the accessory and are not included in this manual. The images throughout this manual are for reference only and your product may look different. 1. Header bracket 2. Pulley 3. Door bracket 4. Curved door arm 5. Straight door arm
(Packaged inside front rail section) 6. Trolley 7. Emergency release rope and handle 8. Rail (1 front and 4 center sections) 9. Garage door opener (motor unit) 10. Chain spreader with screws - Model C2405 11. 12. Chain and cable or chain (D2405C and D21202C only) 13. The Protector System U bracket Safety reversing sensors with 2 conductor white and white/black wire attached: sending sensor (1), receiving sensor (1), and safety sensor brackets (2) 14. Remote control 15. Push Button Door Control - Models C2202C, D2101C, C2102C Multi-Function Control Panel - Model C2405C, D2405C 16 White and red/white wire 17. Installation manual and all warning labels 18. Sprocket cover - Model C2405C, D2405C See Hardware page 6. Go to chamberlain.com for replacement or additional accessories:
3-button remote control model 953EV-P2 Wireless keypad model 940EV-P2 8 x1 2 12 5 8 x4 1 11 3 6 18 9 10 7 4 13 x1 13 x1 13 14 15 16 17 5 Preparation Hardware ASSEMBLY Bolt 1/4-20x1-3/4 Bolt INSTALLATION DOOR CONTROL Lag Screw 5/16-9x1-5/8 (4) Self-Threading Screw 1/4-14x5/8 (2) MODELS C2405 Threaded Shaft Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/2 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Drywall Anchors (2) Screw 6-32x1 (2) Screw 6ABx1 (2) Lock Nut 1/4-20 Master Link (2) Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 (4) Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Model C2212T Hex Screw 10-24 (2) Wing Nut (2) Nut 3/8 Lock Washer 3/8 Nut 5/16-18 (6) Lock Washer 5/16-18 (5) Ring Fastener (3) Drywall Anchors (2) Screw 6ABx1-
1/2 (2) Insulated Staples
(Not Shown) 6 Assembly STEP 1 Assemble the Rail and Install the Trolley To prevent INJURY from pinching, keep hands and fingers away from the joints while assembling the rail. Slide to stops on top and sides of U bracket To avoid installation difficulties, do not run the garage door opener until instructed to do so. The front rail has a cut out window at the door end. The rail tab MUST be on top of the rail when assembled. 1. Remove the straight door arm and hanging bracket packaged inside the front rail and set a side for Installation Step 5 and 9. NOTE: To prevent INJURY while unpacking the rail carefully remove the straight door arm stored within the rail section. 2. Align the rail sections on a flat surface as shown and slide the tapered ends into the larger ones. Tabs along the side will lock into place. 3. Place the motor unit on packing material to protect the cover, and rest the back end of the rail on top. For convenience, put a support under the front end of the rail. 4. As a temporary stop, insert a screwdriver into the hole in the second rail section from the motor unit, as shown. 5. Check to be sure there are 4 plastic wear pads inside the inner trolley. If they became loose during shipping, check all packing material. Snap them back into position as shown. 6. Slide the trolley assembly toward the screwdriver as shown. 7. Slide the rail onto the U bracket, until it reaches all the stops on the top and sides of the U bracket. Screwdriver U Bracket (TO MOTOR UNIT) Rail Tab On Top Trolley Trolley Front Rail Section
(TO DOOR) Wear Pads Wear Pads 7 Assembly STEP 2 Fasten the Rail to the Motor Unit MODEL C2405 To avoid SERIOUS damage to garage door opener, use ONLY those bolts/fasteners mounted in the top of the opener. 1. Insert a1/4-20 x 1-3/4 bolt into the cover protection bolt hole on the back end of the rail as shown. Tighten securely with a1/4-20 lock nut. DO NOT over tighten. 2. Remove the bolts from the top of the motor unit. 3. 4. Place the U bracket, flat side down onto the motor unit and align the bracket holes with Use the carton to support the front end of the rail. the bolt holes. 5. Fasten the U bracket with the previously removed bolts; DO NOT use any power tools. The use of power tools may permanently damage the garage door opener. 6. Attach chain spreader to the motor unit with two screws. HARDWARE Bolt 1/4-20x1-
3/4 Lock Nut 1/4-20 Hex Screws 8-32x7/16 Chain Spreader Bolts (Mounted in the garage door opener) U Bracket Bolt Cover Protection Bolt Hole Lock Nut 8 Assembly STEP 3 Install the Idler Pulley 1. Lay the chain/cable beside the rail, as shown. Grasp the end of the cable and pass approximately 12 (30 cm) of cable through the window. Allow it to hang until Assembly Step 4. 2. Remove the tape from the idler pulley. The inside center should be pre-greased. If dry, regrease to ensure proper operation. 3. Place the idler pulley into the window as shown. 4. Insert the idler bolt from the top through the rail and pulley. Tighten with a 3/8 lock washer and nut underneath the rail until the lock washer is compressed. 5. Rotate the pulley to be sure it spins freely. 6. Locate the rail tab. The rail tab is near the idler pulley on the front rail section. Use a flat head screwdriver and lift the rail tab until the tab is vertical (90). Bolt HARDWARE Nut 3/8 Lock Washer 3/8 Rail Tab Chain/cable Bolt Rail Lock Washer Nut Grease Inside Pulley Idler Pulley 9 Assembly STEP 4 Install the Chain 1. Pull the cable around the idler pulley and toward the trolley. 2. Connect the cable to the retaining slot on the trolley, as shown. (Figure1) a. Push pins of master link bar through cable link and trolley slot. b. Push master link cap over pins and past pin notches. c. Slide the closed end of the clip-on spring over one of the pins. Push the open end of the clip-on spring onto the other pin. Threaded Shaft HARDWARE Master Link 3. 4. With the trolley against the screwdriver, dispense the remainder of the cable/chain along the rail toward the motor unit around the sprocket and continuing to the trolley assembly. The sprocket teeth must engage the chain. (Figure 2) Check to make sure the chain is not twisted, then connect it to the threaded shaft with the remaining master link. 5. Thread the inner nut and lock washer onto the trolley threaded shaft. 6. Insert the trolley threaded shaft through the hole in the trolley. Be sure the chain is not c. b. twisted. (Figure 3) 7. Loosely thread the outer nut onto the trolley threaded shaft. 8. Remove the screwdriver. a. Figure 1 Sprocket Figure 2 Figure 3 Master Link Inner Nut Lock Washer Threaded Shaft Master Link Outer Nut 10 Assembly STEP 5 Tighten the Chain 1. Spin the inner nut and lock washer down the trolley threaded shaft, away from the trolley. 2. To tighten the chain, turn the outer nut in the direction shown. 3. When the chain is approximately 1/4 (6 mm) above the base of the rail at its midpoint, retighten the inner nut to secure the adjustment. Sprocket noise can result if the chain is too loose. When installation is complete, you may no-
tice some chain droop with the door closed. This is normal. If the chain returns to the position shown when the door is open, do not re-adjust the chain. NOTE: During future maintenance, ALWAYS pull the emergency release handle to disconnect the trolley before adjusting the chain. To Tighten Outer Nut Outer Nut Lock Washer Trolley Threaded Shaft Inner Nut To Tighten Inner Nut Chain 1/4 (6 mm) Base of Rail Mid length of Rail 11 Installation IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS WARNING To reduce the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH:
1. READ AND FOLLOW ALL INSTALLATION WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS. 2. Install garage door opener ONLY on properly balanced and lubricated garage door. An improperly balanced door may NOT reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. ALL repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware MUST be made by a trained door systems technician BEFORE installing opener. Disable ALL locks and remove ALL ropes connected to garage door BEFORE installing opener to avoid entanglement. 3. 4. 5. Where possible, install the door opener 7 feet (2.13 m) or more above the floor. 6. Mount the emergency release within reach, but at least 6 feet (1.83 m) above the floor and avoiding contact with vehicles to avoid accidental release. 7. NEVER connect garage door opener to power source until instructed to do so. 8. NEVER wear watches, rings or loose clothing while installing or servicing opener. They could be caught in garage door or opener mechanisms. 9. Install wall-mounted garage door control:
within sight of the garage door. out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface. away from ALL moving parts of the door. 10. Place entrapment warning label on wall next to garage door control in a prominent location. 11. Place emergency release/safety reverse test label in plain view on inside of garage door. 12. Upon completion of installation, test safety reversal system. Door MUST reverse on contact with a 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. 13. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. 14. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. 12 Installation STEP 1 Determine the Header Bracket Location Header Wall Vertical Centerline of Garage Door OPTIONAL CEILING MOUNT FOR HEADER BRACKET WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
Header bracket MUST be RIGIDLY fastened to structural support on header wall or ceiling, otherwise garage door might NOT reverse when required. DO NOT install header bracket over drywall. Concrete anchors MUST be used if mounting header bracket or 2x4 into masonry. NEVER try to loosen, move or adjust garage door, springs, cables, pulleys, brackets, or their hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension. ALWAYS call a trained door systems technician if garage door binds, sticks, or is out of balance. An unbalanced garage door might NOT reverse when required. Installation procedures vary according to garage door types. Follow the instructions which apply to your door. 1. Close the door and mark the inside vertical centerline of the garage door. 2. Extend the line onto the header wall above the door. You can fasten the header bracket within 4 feet (1.22 m) of the left or right of the door center only if a torsion spring or center bearing plate is in the way; or you can attach it to the ceiling (see page 16) when clearance is minimal. (It may be mounted on the wall upside down if necessary, to gain approximately 1/2 (1 cm). If you need to install the header bracket on a 2x4 (on wall or ceiling), use lag screws (not provided) to securely fasten the 2x4 to structural supports as shown here and on page 16. 3. Open your door to the highest point of travel as shown. Draw an intersecting horizontal line on the header wall 2 (5 cm) above the high point:
2 (5 cm) above the high point for sectional door and one-piece door with track. 8 (20 cm) above the high point for one-piece door without track. This height will provide travel clearance for the top edge of the door. NOTE: If the total number of inches exceeds the height available in your garage, use the maximum height possible, or refer to page 16 for ceiling installation. 2x4 Structural Supports Unfinished Ceiling 2x4 Level
(Optional) Sectional door with curved track One-piece door with horizontal track Header Wall 2 (5 cm) Track Highest Point of Travel Door Door Header Wall 2 (5 cm) Track Highest Point of Travel One-piece door without track:
jamb hardware One-piece door without track:
pivot hardware Header Wall 8 (20 cm) Highest Point of Travel Door Jamb Hardware Door Header Wall 8 (20 cm) Highest Point of Travel Pivot 13 Installation STEP 2 Install the Header Bracket You can attach the header bracket either to the wall above the garage door, or to the ceiling. Follow the instructions which will work best for your particular requirements. Do not install the header bracket over drywall. If installing into masonry, use concrete anchors (not provided). WALL INSTALLATION Wall Mounting Holes 2x4 Structural Support HARDWARE Lag Screw 5/16-9x1-5/8 OPTION A - WALL INSTALLATION 1. Center the bracket on the vertical centerline with the bottom edge of the bracket on the horizon-
tal line as shown (with the arrow pointing toward the ceiling). 2. Mark the vertical set of bracket holes. Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten the bracket securely to a structural support with the hardware provided. OPTION B - CEILING INSTALLATION 1. Extend the vertical centerline onto the ceiling as shown. 2. Center the bracket on the vertical mark, no more than 6 (15 cm) from the wall. Make sure the arrow is pointing away from the wall. The bracket can be mounted flush against the ceiling when clearance is minimal. 3. Mark the side holes. Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten bracket securely to a structural support with the hardware provided. Header Wall Header Bracket Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Lag Screw Door Spring Garage Door Finished Ceiling Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Lag Screw Header Wall UP Horizontal Line Optional Mounting Holes Highest Point of Garage Door Travel CEILING INSTALLATION Ceiling Mounting Holes UP Header Bracket 6 (15 cm) Maximum Door Spring Garage Door 14 Installation STEP 3 Attach the Rail to the Header Bracket 1. Position the opener on the garage floor below the header bracket. Use packing material as a protective base. NOTE: If the door spring is in the way, you will need help. Have someone hold the opener securely on a temporary support to allow the rail to clear the spring. 2. Position the rail bracket against the header bracket. 3. Align the bracket holes and join with a clevis pin as shown. 4. Insert a ring fastener to secure. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/2 Clevis Pin Ring Fastener Ring Fastener STEP 4 Position the Garage Door Opener To prevent damage to garage door, rest garage door opener rail on 2x4 placed on top section of door. 1. 2. Remove the packing material and lift the garage door opener onto a ladder. Fully open the door and place a 2x4 (laid flat) under the rail. For one-piece doors without tracks, lay the 2x4 on its side. NOTE: A 2x4 is ideal for setting the distance between the rail and the door. If the ladder is not tall enough you will need help at this point. If the door hits the trolley when it is raised, pull the trolley release arm down to dis-
connect the inner and outer trolley. Slide the outer trolley toward the garage door opener. The trolley can remain disconnected until instructed. Connected Disconnected 2x4 2x4 One-piece door without tracks All other door types 15 Installation STEP 5 Hang the Garage Door Opener HARDWARE WARNING To avoid possible SERIOUS INJURY from a falling garage door opener, fasten it SECURELY to structural supports of the garage. Concrete anchors MUST be used if installing ANY brackets into masonry. Hanging the garage door opener will vary depending on your garage. Below are three example installations. Your installation may be different. For ALL installations the garage door opener MUST be connected to structural supports. The instructions illustrate one of the examples below. 1. 2. On finished ceilings, use the lag screws to attach a support bracket (not provided) to the structural supports before installing the garage door opener. Make sure the garage door opener is aligned with the header bracket. Measure the distance from each side of the garage door opener to the support bracket. EXAMPLES Lag Screw 5/16-
9x1-5/8 Nut 5/16-18 Hex Bolt 5/16-
18x7/8 Lock Washer 5/16-18 3. Cut both pieces of the hanging bracket (not provided) to required lengths. 4. Attach the end of each hanging bracket to the support bracket with appropriate hardware (not provided). Attach the garage door opener to the hanging brackets with the hex bolts, lock washers, and nuts. Remove the 2x4 and manually close the door. If the door hits the rail, raise the header bracket. 5. 6. Finished Ceiling Unfinished Ceiling 1 Finished Ceiling 2 Not Provided 3 Not Provided Not Provided Lag Screw Lag Screw 4 Not Provided 16 6 5 Lock Washer Hex Bolt Nut Installation STEP 6 Install the Light Bulbs CAUTION To prevent possible OVERHEATING of the end panel or light socket:
Use ONLY A19 light bulbs. DO NOT use incandescent bulbs larger than 100W. DO NOT use compact fluorescent light bulbs larger than 26W (100W equivalent). DO NOT use halogen bulbs. DO NOT use short neck or specialty light bulbs. LED bulbs may cause remote control radio interference. Use ONLY LED bulbs recommended here: chamberlain.com/bulb. 1. Pull light lens down. 2. Insert light bulb. 3. Close light lens. or o or o or o STEP 7 Attach the Emergency Release Rope and Handle WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a falling garage door:
If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly. NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. NEVER use handle to pull door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. 1. Insert one end of the emergency release rope through the handle. Make sure that NOTICE is right side up. Secure with an overhand knot at least 1 (2.5 cm) from the end of the rope to prevent slipping. 2. Insert the other end of the emergency release rope through the hole in the trolley release arm. Mount the emergency release within reach, but at least 6 feet (1.83 m) above floor, avoiding contact with vehicles to prevent accidental release and secure with an overhand knot. NOTE: If it is necessary to cut the emergency release rope, seal the cut end with a match or lighter to prevent unraveling. Ensure the emergency release rope and handle are above the top of all vehicles to avoid entanglement. 17 Installation STEP 8 Install the Door Bracket CAUTION Fiberglass, aluminum or lightweight steel garage doors WILL REQUIRE reinforcement BEFORE installation of door bracket. Contact the garage door manufacturer or installing dealer for opener rein-
forcement instructions or reinforcement kit. Failure to reinforce the top section as required according to the door manufacturer may void the door warranty. A horizontal and vertical reinforcement is needed for lightweight garage doors (fiberglass, aluminum, steel, doors with glass panel, etc.) (not provided). A horizontal reinforcement brace should be long enough to be secured to two or three vertical supports. A vertical reinforcement brace should cover the height of the top panel. Contact the garage door manufacturer or installing dealer for opener reinforce-
ment instructions or reinforcement kit. NOTE: Many door reinforcement kits provide for direct attachment of the clevis pin and door arm. In this case you will not need the door bracket; proceed to the next step. OPTION A - SECTIONAL DOORS 1. Center the door bracket on the previously marked vertical centerline used for the header bracket installation. Note correct UP placement, as stamped inside bracket. 2. Position the top edge of the bracket 2-4 (5-10 cm) below the top edge of the door, OR directly below any structural support across the top of the door. 3. Mark, drill holes and install as follows, depending on your doors construction. Metal or light weight doors using a vertical angle iron brace in the door panel support and the door bracket:
Drill 3/16 fastening holes. Secure the door bracket using the two 1/4-14x5/8 self-threading screws. (Figure 1) Alternately, use two 5/16-18x2 bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided). (Figure 2) Metal, insulated or light weight factory reinforced doors:
Drill 3/16 fastening holes. Secure the door bracket using the self-threading screws. (Figure 3) Wood doors:
Use top and bottom or side to side door bracket holes. Drill 5/16 holes through the door and secure bracket with 5/16-18x2 carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided). (Figure 4) NOTE: The 1/4-14x5/8 self-threading screws are not intended for use on wood doors. HARDWARE Self-Threading Screw 1/4-14x5/8 Horizontal Reinforcement Vertical Reinforcement FIGURE 1 Door Bracket Self-Threading Screw FIGURE 3 Vertical Reinforcement Vertical Centerline of Garage Door UP Vertical Centerline of Garage Door UP FIGURE 2 Vertical Reinforcement Vertical Centerline of Garage Door Door Bracket UP Inside Edge of Door or Reinforcement Board UP Hardware
(not provided) FIGURE 4 Hardware
(not provided) Self-Threading Screw Vertical Centerline of Garage Door 18 Installation STEP 8 Install the Door Bracket (continued) OPTION B - ONE-PIECE DOORS 1. Center the door bracket on the top of the door, in line with the header bracket as shown. 2. Mark either the left and right, or the top and bottom holes. Metal Doors:
Drill 3/16 pilot holes and fasten the bracket with the self-threading screws provided. Wood Doors:
Drill 5/16 holes and use 5/16-18x2 carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts (not provided) or 5/16x1-1/2 lag screws (not provided) depending on your installation needs. NOTE: The door bracket may be installed on the top edge of the door if required for your installation. (Refer to the dotted line optional placement drawing.) Header Wall Header Bracket 2x4 Support
(Finished Ceiling) Door Bracket Optional Placement of Door Bracket Vertical Centerline of Garage Door For a door with no exposed framing, or for the optional installation, use lag screws 5/16x1-1/2 (not provided) to fasten the door bracket. Metal Door Self-Threading Screw Wood Door Door Bracket Top of Door
(Inside Garage) Door Bracket Top Edge of Door Optional Placement Hardware (not provided) Top of Door
(Inside Garage) Top Edge of Door Optional Placement Hardware (not provided) 19 Installation STEP 9 Connect the Door Arm to the Trolley Installation will vary according to the garage door type. Follow the instructions which apply to your door. OPTION A - SECTIONAL DOORS IMPORTANT: The groove on the straight door arm MUST face away from the curved door arm. 1. Close the door. Disconnect the trolley by pulling the emergency release handle. 2. Attach the straight door arm to the outer trolley using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. 3. Attach the curved door arm to the door bracket using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring 4. 5. fastener. Bring arm sections together. Find two pairs of holes that line up and join sections. Select holes as far apart as possible to increase door arm rigidity and attach using the bolts, nuts, and lock washers. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener until the trolley release arm is horizontal. The trolley will re-engage automatically when the garage door opener is activated. NOTE: If the holes in the curved door arm and the straight door arm do not align, reverse the straight door arm, select two holes (as far apart as possible) and attach using bolts, nuts, and lock washers. If the straight door arm is hanging down too far, you may cut 6 (15 cm) from the solid end. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 Ring Fastener Lock Washer 5/16-18 Nut 5/16-18 Ring Fastener Lock Washer Nut Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt Cut If Needed Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Straight Door Arm
(Groove facing out) Curved Door Arm 20 Installation STEP 9 Connect the Door Arm to the Trolley (continued) OPTION B - ONE-PIECE DOORS IMPORTANT: The groove on the straight door arm MUST face away from the curved door arm. 1. Close the door. Disconnect the trolley by pulling the emergency release handle. 2. Fasten the straight door arm and the curved door arm together to the longest possible length
(with a 2 or 3 hole overlap) using the bolts, nuts, and lock washers. Attach the straight door arm to the door bracket using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Attach the curved door arm to the trolley using the clevis pin. Secure with the ring fastener. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener until the trolley release arm is horizontal. 3. 4. 5. HARDWARE Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Hex Bolt 5/16-18x7/8 Ring Fastener Lock Washer 5/16 -18 Nut 5/16-18 Straight Door Arm
(Groove facing out) Curved Door Arm One-Piece Door without Track Ring Fastener Ring Fastener Nut Lock Washer Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Hex Bolts One-Piece Door with Track Ring Fastener Ring Fastener Nut Lock Washer Clevis Pin 5/16x1-1/4 Hex Bolts Clevis Pin 5/16x1 Clevis Pin 5/16x1 21 1. Strip 1/4 (6 mm) of insulation from one end of the wire and separate the wires. 2. Connect one wire to each of the two screws on the back of the door control. The wires can be connected to either screw. 3. Mount the door control with the hardware provided. 1 2 3 1/4 (6 mm) Installation STEP 10 Install the Door Control PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution:
Be sure power is NOT connected BEFORE installing door control. Connect door control ONLY to 12 VOLT low voltage wires. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a closing garage door:
Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a mini-
mum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. NEVER permit children to operate or play with door control push buttons or remote control transmitters. Activate door ONLY when it can be seen clearly, is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight until completely closed. NEVER permit anyone to cross path of closing garage door. INTRODUCTION Install the door control within sight of the door at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, where small children cannot reach, and away from the moving parts of the door. NOTE: Your product may look different than the illustrations. HARDWARE Screw 6ABx1-1/2 (2) Drywall Anchors (2) 22 Installation MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution:
Be sure power is NOT connected BEFORE installing door control. Connect door control ONLY to 12 VOLT low voltage wires. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a closing garage door:
Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a mini-
mum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. NEVER permit children to operate or play with door control push buttons or remote control transmitters. Activate door ONLY when it can be seen clearly, is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight until completely closed. NEVER permit anyone to cross path of closing garage door. INTRODUCTION Older Chamberlain door controls and third party products are not compatible. Install door control within sight of garage door, out of reach of small children at a minimum height of 5 feet (1.5 m) above floors, landings, steps or any other adjacent walking surface, and away from ALL moving parts of door. For gang box installations it is not necessary to drill holes or install the drywall anchors. Use the existing holes in the gang box. NOTE: Your product may look different than the illustrations. Screw 6-32x1 (2) HARDWARE Screw 6ABx1 (2) Drywall Anchors (2) 1. Strip 7/16 (11 mm) of insulation from one end of the wire and separate the wires. 2. Connect one wire to each of the two screws on the back of the door control. The wires can be connected to either screw. If your garage is pre-wired for the door control choose any two wires to connect, note which wires are used so the correct wires are connected to the garage door opener in a later step. Install the bottom screw, allowing 1/8 (3 mm) to protrude from the wall. 3. Mark the location of the bottom mounting hole and drill a 5/32 hole. 4. 5. Position the bottom hole of the door control over the screw and slide down into place. 6. Lift the push bar up and mark the top hole. 7. Remove the door control from the wall and drill a 5/32 hole for the top screw. 8. Position the bottom hole of the door control over the screw and slide down into place. Attach the top screw. 1 7/16 (11 mm) 2 3 Wall DRYWALL GANG BOX Drywall Anchor 6-32x1 6ABx1 4-5 7 6 8 DRYWALL GANG BOX Drywall Anchor 6-32x1 6ABx1 23 Installation STEP 11 Wire the Door Control to the Garage Door Opener 1. Run the white and red/white wire from the door control to the garage door opener. Attach the wire to the wall and ceiling with the staple (not applicable for gang box or pre-wired installa-
tions). Do not pierce the wire with the staple as this may cause a short or an open circuit. 2. Strip 7/16 (11 mm) of insulation from the end of the wire near the garage door opener. 3. Connect the wire to the red and white terminals on the garage door opener. If your garage is pre-wired make sure you use the same wires that are connected to the door control. To insert or release wires from the terminal, push in the tab with screwdriver tip. 1 3 HARDWARE Insulated Staple (Not Shown) 2 7/16 (11 mm) Staple Wire channel E T I H W D E R STEP 12 Attach the Warning Labels 1. Attach the entrapment warning label on the wall near the door control with tacks or staples. Attach the manual release/safety reverse test label in a visible location on the inside of the garage door. 2. 24 Installation STEP 13 Install the Protector System WARNING Be sure power is NOT connected to the garage door opener BEFORE installing the safety reversing sensor. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from closing garage door:
Correctly connect and align the safety reversing sensor. This required safety device MUST NOT be disabled. Install the safety reversing sensor so beam is NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above garage floor. Hex Screw 10-24 (2) HARDWARE Wing Nut (2) The safety reversing sensors are designed to clip onto the door track with the provided sensor brackets. If the door track will not support the sensor bracket a wall installation is recommended. The sensor beam should be NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above the floor. DOOR TRACK INSTALLATION 1. Slide the curved arms of the sensor bracket around the edge of the door track. Snap into place so that the sensor bracket is flush against the track. IMPORTANT: The safety reversing sensors MUST be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. 2. Slide the hex screw through the sensor. 3. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the The Protector System includes two safety reversing sensors which use a light beam to prevent the garage door from closing. The sending sensor (amber LED) transmits the beam to the receiving sensor (green LED) when both are powered and aligned. If an obstruction breaks the light beam while the door is closing, the door will stop, and reverse to the full open position. When installing the safety reversing sensors, check:
Sensors are installed INSIDE the garage. Sensor lenses are facing each other. IMPORTANT: Do not allow direct sunlight to the receiving sensor (green LED). Sensor beam is NO HIGHER than 6 (15 cm) above the floor and the light beam is unobstructed. Safety Reversing Sensor Light Beam Protection Area Safety Reversing Sensor bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite door track. Both lenses must face each other. Door track Garage door 3 Wing nut 6 (15 cm) max. 1 2 25 Installation STEP 13 Install the Protector System (continued) WALL OPTION Make sure the brackets on each side are clear of the door track and have the same amount of clearance so the sensors will align correctly. If additional clearance is needed, use extension brackets 041A5281-1 (not provided) or wood blocks. 1. Attach the sensor bracket against the wall with two lag screws (not provided). 2. Slide the hex screw through the sensor. 3. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite side of the garage door. Both lenses must face each other. 1 Door track Inside garage wall Not provided 2 3 OPTIONAL OR Wing Nut 6 (15 cm) max. FLOOR OPTION 1. Measure the position of both sensor brackets so they will be the same distance from the wall and not obstructed. 2. Attach the bracket to the floor with concrete anchors (not provided). 3. Slide the hex screw through the sensor. 4. Attach the sensor to the bracket with the wing nut. Make sure the lens is not obstructed by the bracket. Repeat the steps with the other sensor on the opposite side of the garage door. Both lenses must face each other. Inside garage wall 2 Not provided Door track 4 Wingnut 6 (15 cm) max. 1 3 26 HARDWARE Insulated Staple (Not Shown) 2 Staple 7/16 (11 mm) E T I H W E T I H W Y E R G D E R Installation STEP 14 Wire the Safety Reversing Sensors If your garage has pre-installed wiring for the safety reversing sensors, see OPTION B - PRE-
WIRED INSTALLATION page 29. OPTION A - INSTALLATION WITH NO PRE-WIRING 1. Run the wire from both sensors to the garage door opener. Attach with staples, but DO NOT puncture the wire. 2. Separate the sensor wires and strip insulation from each end. Twist the two white wires together. Then twist the two white/black wires together. 3. Using a screwdriver, push in the terminal tabs, and insert the white wires into the white terminal. Insert the white/black wires into the grey terminal. 1 3 27 Installation STEP 14 Wire the Safety Reversing Sensors (continued) OPTION A - PRE-WIRED INSTALLATION 1. 2. Cut the sensor wires, making sure there is enough wire to reach the pre-installed wires from the wall. Separate the sensor wires and strip insulation from each end. Choose two of the pre-installed wires and strip insulation from each end. Choose the same color pre-installed wires for each sensor. 3. Connect the pre-installed wires to the sensor wires with wire nuts making sure the colors 4. 5. correspond for each sensor. At the garage door opener, strip the end of the wires previously connected to the sensors. Twist the like-colored wires together. Using a screwdriver, push in the terminal tabs, and insert the wire color connected to the sensors white wire into the white terminal. Insert the other wire color connected to the sensors white/black wire into the grey terminal. Safety reversing sensor wires Safety reversing sensor wires White White/Black Pre-installed wires 7/16 (11 mm) Wire nuts (not provided) Pre-installed wires Yellow (for example) Purple (for example) Purple Yellow Y E R G E T I H W Pre-installed wires Wire channel Yellow Purple 7/16 (11 mm) 28 Installation STEP 15 Connect Power WARNING To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from electrocution or fire:
Be sure power is NOT connected to the opener, and disconnect power to circuit BEFORE removing cover to establish permanent wiring connection. Garage door installation and wiring MUST be in compliance with ALL local electrical and building codes. NEVER use an extension cord, 2-wire adapter, or change plug in ANY way to make it fit outlet. Be sure the opener is grounded. To avoid installation difficulties, do not run the opener at this time. To reduce the risk of electric shock, your garage door opener has a grounding type plug with a third grounding pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type outlet. If the plug doesnt fit into the outlet you have, contact a qualified electrician to install the proper outlet. THERE ARE TWO OPTIONS FOR CONNECTING POWER:
OPTION A- TYPICAL WIRING 1. Plug in the garage door opener into a grounded outlet. 2. DO NOT run garage door opener at this time. OPTION B - PERMANENT WIRING If permanent wiring is required by your local code, refer to the following procedure. To make a permanent connection through the 7/8-inch hole in the top of the motor unit (according to local code):
1. Remove the motor unit cover screws and set the cover aside. 2. Remove the attached 3-prong cord. 3. Connect the black (line) wire to the screw on the brass terminal; the white (neutral) wire to the screw on the silver terminal; and the ground wire to the green ground screw. The opener must be grounded. 4. Reinstall the cover. Ground Tab Green Ground Screw Black Wire Ground Wire White Wire 29 Installation STEP 16 Align the Safety Reversing Sensors IMPORTANT: The safety reversing sensors MUST be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. When the garage door opener has power, check the safety reversing sensors. If the sensors are aligned and wired correctly, both LEDs will glow steadily. Light Beam Protection Area SAFETY SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTING If either of the sensor LEDs are off, there is no power to the sensor:
1. Check that you have power to the garage door opener. 2. Check the sensor wire is not shorted or broken. 3. Check that the sensors are wired correctly; white wires to white terminal and white/black wires to grey terminal. 1 3 2 Sending sensor - amber LED To align the safety reversing sensors:
Receiving sensor - green LED The receiving sensor will have a sticker on the back. 1. Loosen the wing nuts. 2. Adjust the sensors up or down until both LEDs glow steady indicating alignment. 3. Tighten the wing nut to secure the sensor. D E R E T I H W Y E R G If the green receiving sensor LED is blinking, the sensors are obstructed or misaligned:
1. Check for obstructions in the sensor light beam. 2. Align the sensors. 3. If the receiving sensor (green LED) faces direct sunlight, switch the receiving sensor with the sending sensor and repeat STEP 12 Install the Protector System page 27 to assure proper operation. STEP 17 Ensure the Door Control is Wired Correctly If the door control has been installed and wired correctly, the command LED on the control panel will blink or the LED behind the push button will blink if installed correctly. Wing nut 30
1 2 | 114-5748-010 EN-FR Part2 | Users Manual | 4.94 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
Adjustments Introduction WARNING ONE-PIECE DOORS ONLY When setting the UP travel for a one-piece door ensure that the door does not slant backwards when fully open (UP). If the door is slanted backwards this will cause unnecessary bucking and/or jerking when the door is opening or closing. Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. Incorrect adjustment of garage door travel limits will interfere with proper operation of safety reversal system. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on floor. Correct Incorrect To prevent damage to vehicles, be sure fully open door provides adequate clearance. Your garage door opener is designed with electronic controls to make setup and adjustments easy. PROGRAMMING BUTTONS The programming buttons are located on the left side panel of the garage door opener and are used to program the travel. While programming, the UP and DOWN buttons can be used to move the door as needed. UP (Open) DOWN (Close) UP Button Adjustment Button DOWN Button PROGRAMMING BUTTONS 31 5 Once the door is in the desired DOWN position press and release the Adjustment Button. The garage door opener lights will flash twice. Program the Travel is now complete. If the garage door opener lights flash 5 times, then programming has timed out and the Travel Limits have not been set. Please restart the Program the Travel process. 2 Automatic Force Set Up Once both the up and down positions have been manually set, the Safety Reversing Sensors will reconnect and become operational. Then, the opener will enter a force-sensing operation by automatically moving the door to open and close. The garage door opener will sound an audible and visual alert before automatically opening and closing the door. The garage door opener will beep three times, confirming that the Automatic Force Setup completed successfully. Adjustment is complete. If you hear one long beep after the door attempts to move, then the Automatic Force Set Up has not completed successfully. Please start over at step 1 of Program the Travel. Adjustments 1 Program the Travel WARNING Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. Incorrect adjustment of garage door travel limits will interfere with proper operation of safety reversal system. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on floor. Note: While programming, the UP and DOWN buttons can be used to move the door as needed. 1 Press and hold the Adjustment Button until the UP Button begins to flash and/or a beep is heard. The Safety Reversing Sensors will be disconnected during the Program the Travel process. 3 Once the door is in the desired UP position press and release the Adjustment Button. The garage door opener lights will flash twice and the DOWN Button will begin to flash. 2 Press and hold the UP Button until the door is in the desired UP position. 4 Press and hold the DOWN Button until the door is in the desired DOWN position. 32 Adjustments 3 Test the Safety Reversal System 4 Test the Protector System WARNING WARNING Without a properly installed safety reversal system, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. Safety reversal system MUST be tested every month. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. Door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. 1 With the door fully open, place a 1-1/2 inch (3.8 cm) board (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor, centered under thegarage door. Without a properly installed safety reversing sensor, persons (particularly small children) could be SERIOUSLY INJURED or KILLED by a closing garage door. 1 Open the door. Place an obstruction in the path of thedoor. 2 With the door fully open, place a 1-1/2 inch (3.8 cm) board (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor, centered under thegarage door. 2 Press the remote control push button to close the door. The door will not move more than an inch
(2.5 cm). The garage door opener will not close from a remote control if the LED in either safety reversing sensor is off (alerting you to the fact that the sensor is misaligned or obstructed). If the garage door opener closes the door when the safety reversing sensor is obstructed (and the sensors are no more than 6 inches [15 cm] above the floor), call for a trained door systems technician. If the door stops but does not reverse:
1. Repeat Program the Travel (seeAdjustment Step 1);
2. Repeat the Safety Reversal test. If the test continues to fail, call a trained door systems technician. 33 myQ App Control Connect With Your Smartphone*
YOU WILL NEED:
Wi-Fi enabled smartphone, tablet or laptop Broadband Internet connection Wi-Fi signal in the garage (2.4 GHz, 802.11b/g/n required), see page 5 Password for your home network (routers main account, not guest network) myQ serial number located on the garage door opener DOWNLOAD THE myQ APP TO SET UP AN ACCOUNT AND CONNECT Open and close your door, get alerts and set schedules from anywhere. Connected smart garage door openers also receive software updates to ensure the opener has the latest operational features. The garage door opener must run through a complete cycle before it will activate Wi-Fi programming. 1. Download the myQ App. 2. Set up an account and connect. If you already have the myQ App installed:
1. Check that your mobile device has the latest software. 2. Download the latest version of the myQ App. For more information on connecting your garage door opener, visit support.chamberlaingroup.com. NOTES:
To erase the Wi-Fi settings from the opener, see page 39. Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC. App Store and the Apple and App Store logos are trademarks of Apple Inc.
*Smartphone control is not available on models C2102C and D2101C. Learn Button LED An LED on the garage door opener will indicate Wi-Fi status. See table below. Wi-Fi Status LED Blue Definition Off - Wi-Fi is not turned on. Blinking - Garage door opener is in Wi-Fi learn mode. Solid - Mobile device connected to the garage door opener. Blue and Green Blinking - Attempting to connect to router. Green Blinking - Attempting to connect to the Internet server. Solid - Wi-Fi has been set up and garage door opener is connected to the Internet. 34 Operation IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS To reduce the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH:
1. READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS. 2. ALWAYS keep remote controls out of reach of children. NEVER permit children to operate or play with garage door control push buttons or remote controls. ONLY activate garage door when it can be seen clearly, it is properly adjusted, and there are no obstructions to door travel. ALWAYS keep garage door in sight and away from people and objects until completely closed. NO ONE SHOULD CROSS THE PATH OF THE MOVING DOOR. NO ONE SHOULD GO UNDER A STOPPED, PARTIALLY OPENED DOOR. If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Use caution when using this release with the door open. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly and increasing the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. NEVER use handle to pull garage door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. After ANY adjustments are made, the safety reversal system MUST be tested. 10. Safety reversal system MUST be tested every month. Garage door MUST reverse on contact with 1-1/2 (3.8 cm) high object (or a 2x4 laid flat) on the floor. Failure to adjust the garage door opener properly increases the risk of SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 11. ALWAYS KEEP GARAGE DOOR PROPERLY BALANCED (see page 3). An improperly balanced door may NOT reverse when required and could result in SEVERE INJURY or DEATH. 12. ALL repairs to cables, spring assemblies and other hardware, ALL of which are under EXTREME tension, MUST be made by a trained door systems technician. 13. ALWAYS disconnect electric power to garage door opener BEFORE making ANY repairs or removing covers. 14. This operator system is equipped with an unattended operation feature. The door could move unexpectedly. NO ONE SHOULD CROSS THE PATH OF THE MOVING DOOR. 15. DO NOT install on a one-piece door if using devices or features providing unattended close. Unattended devices and features are to be used ONLY with sectional doors. 16. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Using your Garage Door Opener The garage door opener can be activated through a wall-mounted door control, remote control, wireless keyless entry or myQ App. When the door is closed and the garage door opener is activated the door will open. If the door makes contact with an obstruction while opening, the door will stop, opener beeps and lights flash 5 times. When the door is in any position other than closed and the garage door opener is activated, the door will close. If the garage door makes contact with an obstruction while closing, the door will reverse, opener beeps and lights flash 5 times. However, you can close the door if you hold the button on the door control or keyless entry until the door is fully closed. The safety reversing sensors do not affect the opening cycle. The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. The garage door opener lights will turn on when the opener is initially plugged in, the opener is activated, or power is restored after interruption. The garage door opener lights automatically turn off after a set length of time. To adjust the light settings, see Using your Door Control. 35 Operation Using your Door Control MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL Push Bar Command LED LEARN Button LOCK Button LIGHT Button SYNCHRONIZE THE DOOR CONTROL: To synchronize the door control to the garage door opener, press the push bar until the garage door opener activates (it may take up to 3 presses). Test the door control by pressing the push bar; each press of the push bar will activate the garage door opener. PUSH BAR: Press the push bar to open or close the door. LEARN BUTTON: Use to program compatible remote controls, wireless keyless entries and myQ devices to the garage door opener. LOCK: Prevents remote controls from working, while still allowing activation from the door control and keyless entry.
(Factory setting is OFF.) Turn ON:
Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The com-
mand LED will flash as long as the lock feature is on. Turn OFF:
Press and hold the LOCK button for 2 seconds. The command LED will stop flashing and normal operation will resume. LIGHT BUTTON: Turns the garage door opener lights on or off when pressed. Lights stay on for 4-1/2 minutes (factory setting). The LIGHT button will not control the lights when the door is in motion. To change the amount of time the lights stay on:
Press and hold the LOCK button (approximately 10 seconds) until the garage door opener lights flash. The time interval is indicated by the number of times the garage door opener lights flash:
1 flash is 1-1/2 minutes 2 flashes is 2-1/2 minutes 3 flashes is 3-1/2 minutes 4 flashes is 4-1/2 minutes To cycle through the time intervals repeat the step above. If the push bar LED is continuously blinking, the LOCK feature needs to be turned off. PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL Push Button LIGHT Button SYNCHRONIZE THE DOOR CONTROL: To synchronize the door control to the garage door opener, press the push button until the garage door opener activates (it may take up to 3 presses). PUSH BUTTON: Press the LIGHT button to turn the garage door opener lights on or off. When the lights are turned on they will stay on until the LIGHT button is pressed again, or until the garage door opener is activated. Once the garage door opener is activated the lights will turn off after the specified period of time (the factory setting is 4-1/2 minutes). The LIGHT button will not control the lights when the door is in motion. 36 Operation Remote Control and Keyless Entry PRE-PROGRAMMED REMOTE CONTROL INCLUDED, NO NEED TO PROGRAM THE REMOTE. To add or reprogram a remote control, follow the instructions below. Older Chamberlain remote controls are NOT compatible. PROGRAM USING THE MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL 1. Press the LEARN button on the door control to enter programming mode. The command LED will flash once. 2. Press the LEARN button again, the command LED will flash once again. 3. Remote Control: Press the button on the remote control that you wish to operate your garage door. Keyless Entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press the ENTER button. PROGRAM USING THE PUSH BUTTON DOOR CONTROL 1. Press and hold the light button and the push button until the push button LED begins to blink. 2. Remote control: Press the button on the remote control that you wish to operate your garage door. Keyless entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press the ENTER button. Push Button LIGHT Button PROGRAM USING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER LEARN BUTTON 1. Locate the LEARN Button. 2. Press and immediately release the LEARN button. The LEARN LED will glow steady for 30 seconds. Within 30 seconds... 3. Remote Control: Press and hold the button on the remote control that you wish to use. Key-
less Entry: Enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) of your choice on the keyless entry keypad. Then press and hold the ENTER button. Release the button when the garage door opener lights blink or two clicks are heard. 1-2 3 LEARN Button LEARN LED i c k c l i c k c l OR PIN HomeLink If your vehicle is equipped with HomeLink, a Compatibility Bridge (not included) may be necessary for certain vehicles. Visit bridge.chamberlain.com to find out if a Bridge is needed. OR PIN The garage door opener lights will flash (or two clicks will be heard) when the code has been programmed. Repeat the steps for programming additional remote controls or keyless entry devices. If programming is unsuccessful, follow the steps to program using the garage door opener LEARN button. 37 Operation Erase the Memory ERASE ALL REMOTE CONTROLS AND KEYLESS ENTRIES 1. Press and hold the LEARN button on garage door opener until the learn LED goes out
(approximately 6 seconds). All remote control and keyless entry codes are now erased. Reprogram any accessory you wish to use. ERASE ALL DEVICES INCLUDING myQ ENABLED ACCESSORIES 1. Press and hold the LEARN button on garage door opener until the learn LED goes out 2.
(approximately 6 seconds). Immediately press and hold the LEARN button again until the learn LED goes out. All codes are now erased. Reprogram any accessory you wish to use. ERASE THE CONNECTION FROM GARAGE DOOR OPENER TO HOME Wi-Fi NETWORK 1. Press and hold the black adjustment button on the garage door opener until 3 beeps are heard
(Approximately 6 seconds). LEARN Button To Open the Door Manually To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from a falling garage door:
If possible, use emergency release handle to disengage trolley ONLY when garage door is CLOSED. Weak or broken springs or unbalanced door could result in an open door falling rapidly and/or unexpectedly. NEVER use emergency release handle unless garage doorway is clear of persons and obstructions. NEVER use handle to pull door open or closed. If rope knot becomes untied, you could fall. DISCONNECT THE TROLLEY 1. The door should be fully closed if possible. 2. Pull down on the emergency release handle so the trolley release arm snaps to the vertical position. The door can now be raised and lowered as often as necessary. TO RE-CONNECT THE TROLLEY 1. Pull the emergency release handle toward the garage door opener so the trolley release arm snaps to the horizontal position. The trolley will reconnect on the next UP or DOWN operation, either manually or by using the door control or remote control. 38 Maintenance Maintenance Schedule EVERY MONTH Manually operate door. If it is unbalanced or binding, call a trained door systems technician. Check to be sure door opens and closes fully. Adjust if necessary, see page 33. Test the safety reversal system. Adjust if necessary, see page 35. EVERY YEAR Oil door rollers, bearings and hinges. The garage door opener does not require additional lubrication. Do not grease the door tracks. Test the battery backup and consider replacing the battery to ensure the garage door opener will operate during an electrical power outage, see page 36 to test the battery backup. The Remote Control Battery WARNING If battery is swallowed, immediately notify doctor. To prevent possible SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
NEVER allow small children near batteries. To reduce risk of fire, explosion or chemical burn:
Replace ONLY with 3V CR2032 coin batteries. DO NOT recharge, disassemble, heat above 212F (100C) or incinerate. NOTICE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum 20 cm (8 in.) distance is maintained between users/
bystanders and device. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada ICES standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the in-
structions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The 3V CR2032 Lithium battery should produce power for up to 3 years. If the battery is low, the remote controls LED will not flash when the button is pressed. To replace battery, pry open the case first in the middle (1), then at each side (2 and 3) with the visor clip. Replace the batteries with only 3V CR2032 coin cell batteries. Insert battery positive side up. Dispose of old batteries properly. 3 1 2 39 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Chart Your garage door opener is programmed with self-diagnostic capabilities. The UP and DOWN arrows on the garage door opener flash the diagnostic codes. DIAGNOSTIC CODE SYMPTOM SOLUTION Flashes Flashes 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 5 The garage door opener will not close. Safety reversing sensors are not installed, connected, or wires may be cut. Inspect sensor wires for a disconnected or cut wire. The garage door opener will not close. The door control will not function. The garage door opener will not close. There is a short or reversed wire for the safety reversing sensors. Inspect safety sensor wire at all staple and connection points, replace wire or correct as needed. The wires for the door control are shorted or the door control is faulty. Inspect door control wires at all staple and connection points, replace wire or correct as needed. Safety reversing sensors are misaligned or were momentarily obstructed. Realign both sensors until both LEDs are glowing steady. Make sure nothing is hanging or mounted on the door that would interrupt the sensors path while closing. Door moves 6-8 (15-20 cm) stops or reverses. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Check wiring connections at travel module and at the logic board. Replace travel module if necessary. No movement, only a single click. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Replace logic board if necessary. Opener hums for 1-2 seconds no movement. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. Replace motor if necessary. 6 Door coasts after it has come to a complete stop. Program travel to coasting position or have door balanced by a trained door systems technician. 1-5 No movement, or sound. Replace logic board. 2 3 Unable to set the travel or retain position. Check travel module for proper assembly, replace if necessary. The battery status LED is constantly flashing green. Battery backup charging circuit error, replace the logic board. 1-4 Door is moving, stops or reverses. Opener beeps and lights flash. Manually open and close the door. Check for binding or obstructions, such as a broken spring or door lock, correct as needed. If the door is binding or sticking contact a trained door systems technician. If door is not binding or sticking attempt to reprogram travel, see Program the Travel page 31. 5 6 Opener runs approximately 6-8 (15-20 cm), stops and reverses. Communication error to travel module. Check travel module connections, replace travel module if necessary. The garage door opener will not close. Safety reversing sensors are misaligned or were momentarily obstructed. Realign both sensors to ensure both LEDs are steady and not flickering. Make sure nothing is hanging or mounted on the door that would interrupt the sensors path while closing. 40 Troubleshooting Additional Troubleshooting My garage door opener beeps and flashes its lights before door closes:
Garage door opener has been activated through a device or feature such as Timer-to-
Close or garage door monitor. My garage door opener stops, reverses, beeps and flashes its lights:
Check for binding or obstructions anywhere along the track to garage floor. My remote control will not activate the garage door:
Verify the lock feature is not activated on the door control. Reprogram the remote control. If the remote control will still not activate the door check the diagnostic codes to ensure the garage door opener is working properly. My door will not close The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. Check for binding or obstructions anywhere along the track to garage floor. The safety reversing sensor must be connected and aligned correctly before the garage door opener will move in the down direction. o Verify the safety reversing sensors are properly installed, aligned and free of any obstructions. Wi-Fi troubleshooting The garage door opener will NOT enter Wi-Fi learn mode:
After the initial installation of the garage door opener, the garage door opener must complete a full cycle (open and closed) before the Wi-Fi learn mode can be activated. If there has been a recent power outage, the garage door opener must complete a full cycle before the Wi-Fi learn mode can be activated. See page 37 to activate Wi-Fi LEARN mode. If your black adjustment button is not solid green go to support.chamberlaingroup.com. My vehicles Homelink is not programming to my garage door opener:
Compatibility Bridge (not included) may be necessary for certain vehicles. Visit bridge.chamberlain. com to find out if a Bridge is needed. My neighbors remote control opens my garage door:
Erase the memory from your garage door opener and reprogram the remote control(s). Safety sensor LED lights are not lit:
If the sensor LEDs do not glow steadily when the opener is activated, see SAFETY SENSOR TROUBLESHOOTING page 32. o If the receiving sensor (green LED) faces direct sunlight, switch the receiving sensor with the sending sensor so the receiving sensor is not in direct sunlight. 41 Warranty Contact Information STOP!
This garage door opener WILL NOT work until the safety reversing sensors are properly installed and aligned. The Chamberlain Group LLC (Seller) warrants to the first retail purchaser of this product, for the residence in which this product is originally installed, that it is free from defects in materials and/or workmanship for a specific period of time as defined below (the Warranty Period). The warranty period commences from the date of purchase. CHAMBERLAIN LIMITED WARRANTY support.chamberlaingroup.com Visit us online at:
The proper operation of this product is dependent on your compliance with the instructions regarding installation, operation, and maintenance and testing. Failure to comply strictly with those instructions will void this limited warranty in its entirety. If, during the limited warranty period, this product appears to contain a defect covered by this limited warranty, visit chamberlain.com, before dismantling this product. You will be advised of disassembly and shipping. Then send the product or component, pre-paid and insured, as directed to our service center for warranty repair. Please include a brief description of the problem and a dated proof-of-
purchase receipt with any product returned for warranty repair. Products returned to Seller for warranty repair, which upon receipt by Seller are confirmed to be defective and covered by this limited warranty, will be repaired or replaced (at Sellers sole option) at no cost to you and returned pre-paid. Defective parts will be repaired or replaced with new or factory-rebuilt parts at Sellers sole option.
[You are responsible for any costs incurred in removing and/or reinstalling the product or any component]. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE FOR THE RELATED COMPONENT(S), AND NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES WILL EXIST OR APPLY AFTER SUCH PERIOD. Some States and Provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER NON-DEFECT DAMAGE, DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION OR CARE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ABUSE, MISUSE, FAILURE TO PROVIDE REASONABLE AND NECESSARY MAINTENANCE, UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS OR ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS PRODUCT), LABOR CHARGES FOR REINSTALLING A REPAIRED OR REPLACED UNIT, REPLACEMENT OF CONSUMABLE ITEMS (E.G., BATTERIES IN REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTERS AND LIGHT BULBS), OR UNITS INSTALLED FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL USE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER ANY PROBLEMS WITH, OR RELATING TO, THE GARAGE DOOR OR GARAGE DOOR HARDWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE DOOR SPRINGS, DOOR ROLLERS, DOOR ALIGNMENT OR HINGES. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ALSO DOES NOT COVER ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY INTERFERENCE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH USE, OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS PRODUCT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLERS LIABILITY FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY EXCEED THE COST OF THE PRODUCT COVERED HEREBY. NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR US ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of consequential, incidental or special damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state and province to province. 42 Automatic Garage Door Opener Safety & Maintenance Guide Garage Door Opener Safety An Automatic Decision A garage door is the largest moving object in the home. An improperly adjusted garage door and opener can exert deadly force when the door closes which could lead to entrapment of children or adults and subsequent injury or death. Proper installation, operation, maintenance, and testing of the garage door and automatic opener are necessary to provide a safe, trouble-free system. Careless operation or allowing children to play with or use garage door opener controls are also dangerous situations that can lead to tragic results. A few simple precautions can protect your family and friends from potential harm. Please review the safety and maintenance tips in this guide carefully and keep it for reference. Check the operation of your garage door and opener to ensure they function in a safe and trouble-free manner. Be sure to read all Important Safety Information found in your garage door openers manual as it provides more details and safety considerations than can be supplied with this guide. Garage Door Openers are Not Toys Discuss garage door and opener safety with your children. Explain the danger of being trapped under the door. Stay away from a moving door. The wall-mounted push button should be out of reach of children, at least 5 feet from the nearest standing surface and away from all moving parts. Mount and use the button where you can clearly see the closing garage door. Keep transmitters and remote controls out of reach of chil-
dren. Do not let children play with or use transmitters or other remote control devices. Keep the door in sight until it completely closes when using the wall-mounted push button or transmitter. 43 Routine Maintenance Can Prevent Tragedies Make monthly inspection and testing of your garage door and opener system a part of your regular routine. Review your owners manual for both the door and door opener. If you dont have the owners manuals, contact the manufacturer(s) and request a copy for your specific model(s). Look for the opener model number on the back of the power unit. WARNING SPRINGS ARE UNDER HIGH TENSION. ONLY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUALS SHOULD ADJUST THEM. Visually check the door and installation:
Starting with the door in the closed position, use the manual disconnect on the opener to disconnect the door. Look for signs of wear or damage on hinges, rollers, springs, and door panels. These parts may require periodic lubrication. Check the owners manual for suggested maintenance. Verify the photo eye height is no higher than 6 from the garage floor. If any signs of damage are evident, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. Test the door for proper operation:
Open and close the door manually using handles or suitable gripping points. The door should move freely and without difficulty. The door should balance and stay partially open 34 feet above the floor. If you detect any signs of improper operation, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. Test the opener safety features:
Reconnect the opener to the door using the manual disconnect and open the door. Place a 2x4 board flat in the path of the door (1) and try to close it (2). The door should stop when it comes in contact with the 2x4 and then reverse direction. Block the photoelectric sensor by waving an object in front of the sensor and attempt to close the door. The door should not close unless the wall-mounted push button is manually held during operation. If the opener does not perform as described, contact a trained door systems technician for assistance. 2 1 44 Repair Parts Rail Assembly Parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Chain and cable Pulley Master link Rail Trolley assembly: clevis pin (1) and ring (1) U bracket Not shown Wear pads Hardware bag Installation Parts Part Number Description 041A5807 K144C0056 004A1008 041A5665 041C5141-1 041D0598-1 041A7276 041A7920-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Curved door arm Door bracket with clevis pin and fastener Emergency release rope and handle Header bracket with clevis pin and fastener Remote control visor clip Safety sensor bracket Straight door arm White and red/white wire Safety sensor kit: receiving and sending sensors with 2-conductor wire 041-0136 Part Number 041B0035B 041A5047 041A2828 041A5047-2 K029B0137 041-0155-000 4178B0034B 041B4494-1 K010A0020 114-5748-010 1 2 4 10 3V CR2032 lithium battery Not shown Installation Manual 3 5 4 2 1 3 9 6 8 10 6 7 5 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Chain spreader Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Receiver logic board Logic board end panel Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041A7760 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0228-000 045ACTMC 041DB374 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7945 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - C2102C 5 4 3 14 6 7 8 12 9 1 2 13 10 11 46 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts C2405C and D2405C 5 4 3 1 2 13 10 11 14 6 7 8 12 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Chain spreader Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Logic Board End panel for receiver logic board Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041-0037-000 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0028-000 050ACTBMC 041-0025-000 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7946 47 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Model C2202C 5 4 3 1 2 13 10 11 14 6 7 8 12 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Chain spreader Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Logic Board End panel for receiver logic board Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041-0037-000 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0028-000 050ACTBMC 041-0025-000 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7946 48 Repair Parts Garage Door Opener Parts - Model D2101C 5 4 3 1 2 13 10 11 14 6 7 8 12 9 Description 1 Chain spreader 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Gear and sprocket End panel with light socket Light socket Light lens Capacitor Capacitor bracket Travel module Cover Logic Board End panel for receiver logic board Motor with travel module Line cord Terminal block Not shown Wire harness Part Number 041A5615 041C4220A 041D8129 041C0279 041-0144 030B0532-1 K012A0373 041D7742-7 041-0228-000 045ACTMC 041D8374 041D7440 041B4245-1 041A3150 041A7945 49 50 51 114-5748-010 2022 The Chamberlain Group LLC All Rights Reserved Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation The Chamberlain Group LLC 300 Windsor Drive Oak Brook, IL 60523 www.chamberlain.com Manuel dinstallation Ouvre-porte de garage entranement par chane Modles C2405C D2405C C2102C C2202C D2101C USAGE RSIDENTIEL UNIQUEMENT TLCOMMANDE PRPROGRAMME COMMANDE INCLUSE Pour enregistrer votre ouvre-porte de garage afin de recevoir des mises jour et des offres de Chamberlain, visitez Chamberlain.registria.com ou utilisez licne ci-dessous:
1. Prenez une photo de licne dappareil photo incluant les points (
Envoyez-la par SMS au 71403 (tats-Unis). 2.
). Veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel et les documents relatifs la scurit ci-joints!
Fixez le manuel prs de la porte de garage aprs linstallation. La porte NE SE FERMERA PAS si le Protector System nest pas connect et correctement align. Des vrifications priodiques de louvre-porte de garage sont ncessaires pour assurer un fonctionnement sr. Ltiquette du numro de modle est situe sur le panneau arrire de votre ouvre-porte de garage. Cet ouvre-porte de garage est compatible avec les accessoires myQ et Security+ 2.0. NINSTALLEZ PAS cet appareil sur une porte monobloc si vous utilisez des dispositifs ou des fonctionnalits permettant une fermeture sans surveillance. Les dispositifs et fonctionnalits sans surveillance doivent tre utiliss UNIQUEMENT avec des portes sectionnelles. Tlchargez lapplication myQ Available on most iOS and Android Devices Available on most iOS and Android Devices Sommaire Prparation 3 Assemblage 7 Installation 11 Installation de la commande de la porte . 22 Installer le Protector System . 26 Connecter lalimentation . 29 Ajustements 31 Commande de lapplication myQ 34 Connectez-vous avec votre tlphone intelligent . 34 Fonctionnement 38 Utilisation de votre ouvre-porte de garage . 35 Utilisation de la commande de porte . 36 Tlcommande et entre sans cl . 37 Home Link . 37 Effacer la mmoire . 38 Pour ouvrir la porte manuellement . 38 Entretien 39 Dpannage 40 Garantie 42 Guide de scurit et dentretien de louvre-porte de garage automatique 43 Pices dtachs 45 Pices dassemblage des rails . 45 Pices dinstallation . 45 Modle C2102C . 46 Modle C2405C . 47 Modle D2405C . 47 Modle C2202C . 48 Modle D2101C . 49 2 Examen des symboles de scurit et des notes davertissement. Cet ouvre-porte de garage a t conu et test pour offrir un service sr condition quil soit install, utilis, entretenu et test en stricte conformit avec les instructions et les avertissements de ce manuel. AVERTISSEMENT Mcanique AVERTISSEMENT lectrique Lorsque vous voyez ces symboles de scurit et notes davertissement aux pages suivantes, ils vous avertissent du risque de blessures graves voire mortelles si vous ne respectez pas les avertissements quils accompagnent. Le danger peut provenir de quelque chose de mcanique ou dun choc lectrique. Lisez attentivement les avertissements. ATTENTION Lorsque vous voyez ce mot davertissement aux pages suivantes, il vous avertit du risque que votre porte de garage et/ou louvre-porte soit endommag(e) si vous ne respectez pas les mises en garde qui laccompagnent. Lisez-les attentivement. AVERTISSEMENT: Ce produit peut vous exposer des produits chimiques, dont le plomb, qui sont reconnus par ltat de Californie comme provoquant le cancer, des malformations congnitales ou dautres problmes de reproduction. Pour en savoir plus, visitez www.P65Warnings.ca.gov Fonctionnement sans surveillance La fonction de minuterie de fermeture (TTC), lapplication myQ et le moniteur de porte de garage et de portail myQ sont des exemples de fermeture sans surveillance et doivent tre utiliss UNIQUEMENT avec des portes sectionnelles. Tout dispositif ou fonction permettant la porte de se fermer sans tre dans le champ de vision de cette dernire est considr comme une fermeture sans surveillance. La fonction de minuterie de fermeture (TTC), lapplication myQ et tout autre appareil myQ doivent tre utiliss UNIQUEMENT avec des portes sectionnelles. Les images de ce manuel sont fournies titre indicatif uniquement et il est possible que votre produit soit diffrent. Avant de vous connecter avec votre tlphone intelligent*
Surveillez et contrlez votre porte de garage de nimporte o laide de lapplication myQ. Vous aurez besoin dun routeur avec Wi-Fi et dun tlphone intelligent ou dun autre appareil mobile. Assurez-vous que votre appareil mobile est connect votre rseau Wi-Fi. Tenez votre appareil mobile lendroit o votre ouvre-porte de garage sera install et vrifiez la force du signal Wi-Fi. Vrifiez la force du signal. Si vous voyez que:
Le signal Wi-Fi est fort. Vous tes prt!
Installez votre nouvel ouvre-porte de garage. Le signal Wi-Fi est faible. Louvre-porte de garage se connectera probablement votre rseau Wi-Fi. Sinon, essayez lune des options ci-dessous. Aucun signal Wi-Fi. Essayez lune des solutions suivantes:
Rapprochez votre routeur de louvre-porte de garage pour minimiser les interfrences avec les murs et autres objets Achetez un prolongateur de porte Wi-Fi Visitez support.chamberlaingroup.com pour plus de dtails. Voir Commande de lapplication myQ, page37 pour connecter votre ouvre-porte de garage votre rseau Wi-Fi.
*Le contrle par tlphone intelligent nest pas disponible avec les modles C2102 et D2101. Prparation Vrifiez la porte Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES:
Appelez TOUJOURS un technicien qualifi en systmes de porte si la porte de garage se coince, colle ou est dsquilibre. Une porte de garage dsquilibre risque de ne PAS sinverser lorsque cela est ncessaire. Nessayez JAMAIS de desserrer, dplacer ou ajuster la porte de garage, les ressorts de porte, les cbles, les poulies, les supports ou leur matriel, qui sont TOUS sous une tension EXTRME. Dsactivez TOUS les verrous et retirez TOUTES les cordes connectes la porte de garage AVANT dinstaller et dutiliser louvre-porte pour viter tout enchevtrement. Ne linstallez PAS sur une porte monobloc si vous utilisez des dispositifs ou des fonctionnalits permettant une fermeture sans surveillance. Les dispositifs et fonctionnalits sans surveillance doivent tre utiliss UNIQUEMENT avec des portes sectionnelles. Pour viter dendommager la porte de garage et louvre-porte:
Dsactivez TOUJOURS les verrous AVANT dinstaller et dutiliser louvre-porte. Utilisez UNIQUEMENT louvre-porte de garage sur 120V, 60Hz pour viter les dysfonctionnements et les dommages. Avant de commencer:
1. Dsactivez les verrous et retirez toutes les cordes connectes la porte de garage. 2. Soulevez la porte mi-hauteur. Relchez la porte. Si elle est quilibre, elle doit rester en place, entirement soutenue par ses ressorts. Soulevez et abaissez la porte pour vrifier quelle ne se coince pas ou ne colle pas. Si votre porte se coince, colle ou est dsquilibre, appelez un technicien qualifi en systmes de porte. Vrifiez le joint dtanchit au bas de la porte. Tout cart entre le sol et le bas de la porte ne doit pas dpasser 6mm (1/4po). Sinon, le systme dinversion de scurit risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Louvre-porte doit tre install au-dessus du centre de la porte. Sil y a un ressort de torsion ou une plaque dappui centrale sur le chemin du support de linteau, il peut tre install moins de 4pieds (1,2m) gauche ou droite du centre de la porte. Voir page13. 3. 4. 5. Ressort de torsion Ressort dextension 3 Prparation Outils ncessaires 5/32 3/16 5/16 1/2 1/4 7/16 9/16 Articles supplmentaires dont vous pourriez avoir besoin:
Examinez votre garage pour voir si vous aurez besoin de lun des lments suivants:
(2) morceaux de bois 2X4 : Peut tre utilis pour fixer le support de linteau aux supports structurels. galement utilis pour positionner louvre-porte de garage lors de linstallation et pour tester les capteurs dinversion de scurit. Support et matriel de fixation : Doit tre utilis si vous avez un plafond fini dans votre garage. Supports de support Matriel x2 (chaque) Morceaux du support de suspension Supports dextension (Model 041A5281-1) ou blocs de bois: Selon la construc-
tion du garage, des supports dextension ou des blocs de bois peuvent tre nces-
saires pour installer le capteur dinversion de scurit. Tirefonds x4 Tirefonds x12 Supports dextension 041A5281-1 Blocs de bois 7/16 Matriel de fixation : Le montage au sol (autre option) du capteur dinversion scuritaire ncessitera du matriel non fourni. Renfort de porte : Obligatoire si vous avez une porte en acier lger, en aluminium, en fibre de verre ou panneaux de verre. Kit dextension de rail : Obligatoire si la hauteur de votre porte de garage est suprieure 2,13m (7pieds). 4 Prparation Inventaire du carton Conservez le carton et le matriel demballage jusqu ce que linstallation et lajustement soient termins. Les instructions relatives aux accessoires ne sont pas incluses dans ce manuel car elles sont ces derniers. Les images de ce manuel sont fournies titre indicatif uniquement et il est possible que votre produit soit diffrent. 8 x1 2 1. Support de linteau 2. Poulie 3. Support de porte 4. Bras de porte incurv 5. Bras de porte droit
(emball lintrieur de la section de rail avant) 6. Chariot 7. Corde et poigne de dclenchement durgence 8. Rail (1 section avant et 4 sections centrales) 9. Ouvre-porte de garage (bloc moteur) 10. carteur de chane avec vis - Modle C2405 11. Support en U 12. Chane et cble ou chane (D2405C et D21202C uniquement) 13. Protector System Capteurs dinversion de scurit avec 2 fils conducteurs blanc et blanc/noir attachs:
capteur denvoi (1), capteur de rception (1) et supports de capteur de scurit (2) 14. Tlcommande 15. Commande de porte bouton-poussoir - Modles C2202C, D2101C, C2102C Panneau de commande multifonction - Modles C2405C, D2405C 16. Fil blanc et rouge/blanc 17. Manuel dinstallation et toutes les tiquettes davertissement 18. Couvercle de pignon - Modles C2405C, D2405C Voir Matriel, page6. Allez Chamberlain.com pour tout remplacement ou accessoire supplmentaire :
Tlcommande 3 boutons modle 953EV-P2 Clavier sans fil modle 940EV-P2 12 5 8 x4 1 5 11 3 6 18 9 10 7 4 13 x1 13 x1 13 14 15 16 17 Prparation Matriel ASSEMBLAGE Boulon 1/4po - 20 x 1-3/4po Boulon INSTALLATION Tirefond 5/16po - 9 x 1 - 5/8po (4) Vis autotaraudeuse 1/4po - 14x 5/8po (2) Arbre filet Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/2po Axe paulement 5/16pox1po COMMANDE DE PORTE MODLE C2405 Ancrages pour cloisons sches (2) Vis 6-32x1po (2) Vis 6ABx1po (2) Boulon six pans 5/16po - 18 x 7/8po (4) Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/4po Modle C2212T crou darrt 1/4po - 20 Maillon de raccord (2) Vis six pans 10-24 (2) crou oreilles (2) crou 3/8po Rondelle darrt 3/8po crou 5/16po - 18(6) Rondelle darrt 5/16po -18 (5) Anneau de fixation (3) Ancrages pour cloisons sches (2) Vis 6 AB x 1-1/2po (2) Agrafes isoles
(non illustr) 6 Assemblage TAPE 1 Assembler le rail et installer le chariot Pour viter les BLESSURES par pincement, gardez les mains et les doigts loigns des joints lorsque vous assemblez le rail. Pour viter les difficults dinstallation, ne faites pas fonctionner louvre-porte de garage avant dy tre invit. Le rail avant a une fentre dcoupe lextrmit de la porte. Lergot du rail DOIT tre au-dessus du rail lorsquil est assembl. 1. Retirez le bras de porte droit et le support de suspension emballs lintrieur du rail avant et mettez-les de ct pour les tapes dinstallation 5 et 9. REMARQUE : Pour viter toute BLESSURE lors du dballage du rail, retirez soigneusement le bras de porte droit rang dans la section du rail. 2. Alignez les sections de rail sur une surface plane tel quindiqu et faites glisser les extrmits coniques dans les plus grandes. Les ergots du ct se verrouillent en place. 3. Placez le bloc moteur sur du matriel demballage pour protger son couvercle et posez lextrmit arrire du rail au dessus. Pour plus de commodit, placez un support sous lextrmit avant du rail. 4. En tant que bute darrt temporaire, insrez un tournevis dans le trou de la deuxime section de rail du bloc moteur, tel quillustr. 5. Vrifiez quil y a 4patins dusure en plastique lintrieur du chariot intrieur. Sils se sont dtachs pendant le transport, vrifiez tout le matriel demballage. Remettez-les en place tel quindiqu. 6. Faites glisser lassemblage du chariot vers le tournevis tel quillustr. 7. Faites glisser le rail sur le support en U, jusqu ce quil atteigne toutes les butes du dessus et les cts du support en U. Faites glisser jusquaux butes du dessus et des cts du support en U Tournevis Support en U
(VERS LE BLOC MOTEUR) Ergot du dessus du rail Chariot Chariot Section du rail avant
(VERS LA PORTE) Patins dusure 7 Assemblage TAPE 2 Fixer le rail au bloc moteur MODLE C2405 Pour viter de GRAVES dommages louvre-porte de garage, utilisez UNIQUEMENT les boulons/attaches monts sur le dessus de louvre-porte. 1. Insrez un boulon 1/4po - 20 x 1-3/4po dans le trou du boulon de protection du couvercle larrire du rail, tel quillustr. Serrez fermement avec un contre-crou 1/4po - 20. NE PAS trop serrer. 2. Retirez les boulons du haut du bloc moteur. 3. 4. Placez le support en U, ct plat vers le bas, sur le bloc moteur et alignez les trous du Utilisez le carton pour soutenir lextrmit avant du rail. support avec les trous des boulons. 5. Fixez le support en U avec les boulons retirs prcdemment; Nutilisez PAS doutils lectriques. Lutilisation doutils lectriques risque dendommager irrmdiablement louvre-porte de garage. 6. Fixez lcarteur de chane sur le bloc moteur avec deux vis. MATRIEL Boulon 1/4po -
20x1 - 3/4po crou darrt 1/4po - 20 Vis six pans 8-32 x 7/16 carteur de chane Boulons (monts dans louvre-porte de garage) Support en U Boulon Trou du boulon de protection du couvercle crou darrt 8 Assemblage TAPE 3 Installer la poulie de tension 1. Posez la chane/cble ct du rail, comme illustr. Attrapez lextrmit du cble et faites passer environ 30cm (12po) de cble par la fentre. Laissez-le pendre jusqu ltape 4 de lassemblage. 2. Retirez le ruban de la poulie de tension. Le centre intrieur doit tre pr-graiss. Sil est sec, regraissez-le pour vous assurer de son bon fonctionnement. 3. Placez la poulie de tension dans la fentre tel quindiqu. 4. Insrez le boulon de tension par le haut, travers le rail et la poulie. Serrez avec une rondelle darrt de 3/8po et un crou sous le rail jusqu ce que la rondelle darrt soit comprime. 5. Faites tourner la poulie pour vous assurer quelle tourne librement. 6. Localisez longlet du rail. Longlet du rail se trouve proximit de la poulie de tension, dans la section du rail avant. Utilisez un tournevis tte plate pour soulever la languette du rail jusqu ce que celle-ci soit verticale (90). Boulon MATRIEL crou 3/8po Rondelle darrt 3/8po Ergot du rail Chane/cble Boulon Rail Rondelle darrt crou Graissez lintrieur de la poulie Poulie de tension 9 Assemblage TAPE 4 Installer la chane 1. Tirez le cble pour entourer la poulie de tension, en allant vers le chariot. 2. Raccordez le cble la fente de retenue sur le chariot, comme illustr. (Figure1) a. Poussez les goupilles de la barre du maillon de raccord travers le maillon du cble et la fente du chariot. b. Poussez le capuchon du maillon de raccord sur les goupilles, et au-del des encoches de goupille. c. Faites glisser lextrmit ferme du ressort clipser sur lune des broches. Poussez lextrmit ouverte du ressort clipser sur lautre goupille. 3. 4. Avec le chariot contre le tournevis, faites passer le reste du cble/de la chane le long du rail vers le bloc moteur, autour du pignon, puis jusqu lassemblage du chariot. Les dents du pignon doivent engager la chane. (Figure 2) Vrifiez que la chane nest pas tordue, puis connectez-la larbre filet laide du maillon de raccord restant. 5. Vissez lcrou interne et la rondelle darrt sur larbre filet du chariot. 6. Insrez la tige filete du chariot dans le trou du chariot. Vrifiez que la chane nest pas tordue. (Figure3) 7. Vissez lcrou externe sans serrer sur larbre filet du chariot. 8. Retirez le tournevis. Arbre filet c. b. a. Figure 1 MATRIEL Lien matre Pignon Figure 2 Figure 3 Lien matre crou interne Rondelle darrt Arbre filet Lien matre crou externe 10 Assemblage TAPE 5 Serrer la chane 1. Vissez lcrou interne et la rondelle darrt vers le bas sur larbre filet du chariot, dans le sens oppos par rapport au chariot. 2. Pour serrer la chane, tournez lcrou externe dans le sens indiqu. 3. Lorsque la chane se trouve environ 6mm (1/4po) au-dessus du milieu de la base du rail, resserrez lcrou interne pour le fixer. Le pignon peut faire du bruit si la chane nest pas suffisamment tendue. Lorsque linstallation est termine, il est possible que la chane pende un peu quand la porte est ferme. Ceci est normal. Si la chane revient dans la position illustre lorsque la porte est ouverte, ne rajustez pas la chane. REMARQUE : lavenir, lorsque vous effectuez un entretien, tirez TOUJOURS sur la poigne de dclenchement durgence pour dconnecter le chariot avant dajuster la chane. Pour serrer lcrou externe crou externe Rondelle darrt Arbre filet du chariot crou interne Pour serrer lcrou interne Chane 6 mm (1/4po) Base du rail Milieu du rail 11 Installation INSTRUCTIONS DINSTALLATION IMPORTANTES AVERTISSEMENT Pour rduire le risque de BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES :
1. LISEZ ET SUIVEZ TOUS LES AVERTISSEMENTS ET TOUTES LES 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. INSTRUCTIONS DINSTALLATION. Ils pourraient tre happs dans les mcanismes de porte de garage ou douvre-
porte. Une porte mal quilibre risque de ne PAS sinverser lorsque cela est ncessaire et pourrait entraner des BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES. TOUTES les rparations de cbles, ressorts et autre matriel DOIVENT tre effectues par un technicien en systmes de portes qualifi AVANT dinstaller louvre-porte. Dsactivez TOUS les verrous et retirez TOUTES les cordes connectes la porte de garage AVANT dinstaller louvre-porte pour viter quelles senchevtrent. Dans la mesure du possible, installez louvre-porte une hauteur minimum de 2,13m (7pi) du sol. Installez le dclencheur durgence porte de main, mais une distance minimum de moins 1,83m (6pieds) du sol et en vitant tout contact avec les vhicules, afin dviter tout dclenchement accidentel. Ne branchez JAMAIS louvre-porte de garage une source dalimentation avant dy tre invit. NE portez JAMAIS de montres, bagues ou vtements amples en installant ou entretenant louvre-porte. Ils pourraient tre happs dans les mcanismes de porte de garage ou douvre-porte. 9. Installez la commande de porte de garage murale:
en vue de la porte de garage. hors de porte des jeunes enfants, une hauteur minimale de 1,5m (5pieds) au-dessus du sol, des paliers, des marches ou de toute autre surface de marche adjacente. loin de TOUTES les pices mobiles de la porte. 10. Placez une tiquette davertissement de pigeage sur le mur, ct de la commande de porte de garage, dans un endroit bien en vue. 11. Placez ltiquette de test dinversion de scurit/dclenchement durgence bien en vue lintrieur de la porte de garage. 12. Une fois linstallation termine, testez le systme dinversion de scurit. La porte DOIT sinverser au contact dun objet de 3,8cm (1-1/2po) de haut (ou un 2x4 pos plat) sur lesol. 13. NINSTALLEZ PAS cet appareil sur une porte dune seule pice si vous utilisez des dispositifs ou des fonctionnalits permettant une fermeture sans surveillance. Les dispositifs et fonctionnalits sans surveillance doivent tre utiliss UNIQUEMENT avec des portes sectionnelles. 14. CONSERVER CES INSTRUCTIONS. 12 Installation TAPE 1 Dterminer lemplacement du support de linteau Mur du linteau Ligne mdiane verticale de la porte de garage FIXATION AU PLAFOND EN OPTION POUR SUPPORT DE LINTEAU AVERTISSEMENT Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES:
Le support de linteau DOIT tre fix RIGIDEMENT au support structurel du le mur du linteau ou du plafond car sinon la porte de garage risquerait de NE PAS sinverser si ncessaire. Ninstallez PAS le support de linteau sur une cloison sche. Des ancrages bton DOIVENT tre utilises si le support de linteau est mont ou de 2x4 dans la maonnerie. Nessayez JAMAIS de desserrer, dplacer ou ajuster la porte de garage, les ressorts de porte, les cbles, les poulies, les supports ou leur matriel, qui sont TOUS sous une tension EXTRME. Appelez TOUJOURS un technicien qualifi en systmes de porte si la porte de garage se coince, colle ou est dsquilibre. Une porte de garage dsquilibre risque de NE PAS sinverser lorsque cela est ncessaire. Les procdures dinstallation varient selon les types de portes de garage. Suivez les instructions qui sappliquent votre porte. 1. Fermez la porte et marquez la ligne mdiane verticale intrieure de la porte de garage. 2. Prolongez la ligne sur le mur du linteau au-dessus de la porte. Vous pouvez fixer le support de linteau moins de 4pieds (1,22m) de la gauche ou de la droite du centre de la porte uniquement si un ressort de torsion ou une plaque dappui centrale gne; ou vous pouvez le fixer au plafond (voir page16) lorsque le dgagement est minimal. (Il peut tre mont au mur lenvers si ncessaire, pour gagner environ 1cm (1/2po). Si vous devez installer le support de linteau sur un 2x4 (au mur ou au plafond), utilisez des tirefonds
(non fournis) pour fixer solidement le 2x4 aux supports structurels, tel quillustr ici et la page16. 3. Ouvrez votre porte au point le plus lev du dplacement tel quindiqu. Tracez une ligne horizontale scante sur le mur du linteau 5cm (2po) au-dessus du point le plus haut. 5cm (2po) au-dessus du point haut pour porte sectionnelle et une porte monobloc avec rail. 20cm (8po) au-dessus du point haut pour une porte monobloc sans rail. Cette hauteur fournira un espace de dplacement pour le bord suprieur de la porte. REMARQUE: Si le nombre total de pouces dpasse la hauteur disponible dans votre garage, utilisez la hauteur maximale possible ou reportez-vous la page16 pour linstallation au plafond. 13 2x4 Supports structurels Plafond non fini Niveau bulle
(facultatif) 2x4 Porte sectionnelle avec rail incurv Porte monobloc avec rail horizontal Mur du linteau 5 cm (2 po) Rail Point le plus lev du dplacement Porte Porte monobloc sans rail:
matriel de fixation du bti Mur du linteau 20 cm (8 po) Point le plus lev du dplacement Porte Matriel de fixation du bti Porte Mur du linteau 5 cm (2 po) Rail Point le plus lev du dplacement Porte monobloc sans rail:
matriel de fixation pivotant Mur du linteau Porte 20 cm (8 po) Point le plus lev du dplacement Pivot
1 2 | 114-5748-010 EN-FR Part3 | Users Manual | 4.81 MiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
Installation TAPE 2 Installer le support de linteau Vous pouvez fixer le support de linteau soit au mur au-dessus de la porte de garage, soit au plafond. Suivez les instructions qui conviendront le mieux vos besoins particuliers. Ninstallez pas le support de linteau sur une cloison sche. Si vous effectuez linstallation dans de la maonnerie, utilisez des ancrages bton (non fournis). INSTALLATION MURALE Trous de fixation murale Support structurel 2x4 MATRIEL Tirefond 5/16po - 9 x 1-5/8po OPTION A : INSTALLATION MURALE 1. Centrez le support plac sur la ligne mdiane verticale sur le bord infrieur du support plac sur la ligne horizontale tel quindiqu (la flche oriente vers le plafond). 2. Marquez lensemble vertical de trous de support. Percez des avant-trous de 3/16po et fixez solidement le support un support structurel avec la quincaillerie fournie. OPTION B : INSTALLATION AU PLAFOND 1. tendez la ligne mdiane verticale sur le plafond tel quindiqu. 2. Centrez le support sur la marque verticale, un espacement maximum de 15cm (6po) du mur. Vrifiez que la flche est dirige loppos du mur. Le support peut tre mont au ras du plafond lorsque le dgagement est minimal. 3. Marquez les trous latraux. Percez des avant-trous de 3/16po et fixez solidement le support un support structurel avec la quincaillerie fournie. Mur du linteau Support de linteau Ligne mdiane verticale de la porte de garage Tirefond Ressort de porte Porte de garage Plafond fini Ligne mdiane verticale de la porte de garage Tirefond Mur du linteau HAUT Ligne horizontale Trous de montage optionnels Point le plus lev de la course de la porte de garage INSTALLATION AU PLAFOND Support de linteau Trous de montage au plafond Maximum de 15cm (6po) Ressort de porte HAUT Porte de garage 14 Installation TAPE 3 Fixer le rail au support de linteau 1. Placez louvre-porte sur le sol du garage, sous le support de linteau. Utilisez des matriaux demballage comme base de protection. REMARQUE : Si le ressort de la porte gne, vous aurez besoin daide. Demandez quelquun de tenir fermement louvre-porte sur un support temporaire pour permettre au rail de dgager le ressort. 2. Positionnez le support de rail contre le support de linteau. 3. Alignez les trous du support et joignez-les avec un axe paulement tel quillustr. 4. Insrez un anneau de fixation pour scuriser. MATRIEL Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/2po Axe paulement Anneau de fixation Anneau de fixation TAPE 4 Positionner louvre-porte de garage Pour viter dendommager la porte de garage, placez le rail de louvre-porte de garage sur un 2x4 plac sur la partie suprieure de la porte. 1. 2. Retirez le matriel demballage et soulevez louvre-porte de garage sur une chelle. Ouvrez compltement la porte et placez un 2x4 ( plat) sous le rail. Pour les portes monobloc sans rails, posez le 2x4 sur le ct. REMARQUE : Un 2x4 est idal pour rgler la distance entre le rail et la porte. Si lchelle nest pas assez haute, vous aurez besoin daide ce stade. Si la porte heurte le chariot lorsquil est relev, tirez le bras de dclenchement du chariot vers le bas pour dconnecter les chariots intrieur et extrieur. Faites glisser le chariot extrieur vers louvre-porte de garage. Le chariot peut rester dconnect jusqu ce que vous soyez invit le connecter. Connect Dconnect 2x4 2x4 Porte monobloc sans rails Tous les autres types de porte 15 Installation TAPE 5 Accrocher louvre-porte de garage MATRIEL AVERTISSEMENT Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES causes par la chute dun ouvre-porte de garage, fixez-le SOLIDEMENT aux supports de la structure du garage. Des ancrages bton DOIVENT tre utiliss si vous installez TOUT support dans la maonnerie. La suspension de louvre-porte de garage varie en fonction de votre garage. Vous trouverez ci-dessous trois exemples dinstallation. Il est possible que votre installation soit diffrente. Pour TOUTES les installations, louvre-porte de garage DOIT tre connect aux supports structurels. Les instructions illustrent lun des exemples ci-dessous. 1. 2. Sur les plafonds finis, utilisez les tirefonds pour fixer un support (non fourni) aux supports structurels avant dinstaller louvre-porte de garage. Assurez-vous que louvre-porte de garage est align avec le support de linteau. Mesurez la distance entre chaque ct de louvre-porte de garage et le support. EXEMPLES Tirefond 5/16po -
9 x 1-5/8po crou 5/16po - 18 Boulon six pans 5/16po -
18x7/8po Rondelle darrt 5/16po - 18 3. Coupez les deux morceaux du support de suspension (non fourni) aux longueurs requises. 4. Fixez lextrmit de chaque support de suspension au support avec le matriel appropri
(nonfourni). Fixez louvre-porte de garage aux supports de suspension laide des boulons six pans, rondelles darrt et crous. Retirez le 2x4 et fermez manuellement la porte. Si la porte heurte le rail, soulevez le support de linteau. 5. 6. Plafond fini Plafond non fini 1 Plafond fini 2 Non fourni 3 Non fourni Tirefond Tirefond 4 Non fourni 16 6 5 Rondelle darrt Boulon six pans crou Installation TAPE 6 Installer les ampoules TAPE 7 Fixer la corde et la poigne de dclenchement durgence ATTENTION AVERTISSEMENT Pour viter toute SURCHAUFFE ventuelle du panneau dextrmit ou de la douille dclairage:
Utilisez UNIQUEMENT des ampoules de type A19. Nutilisez PAS dampoules incandescence de plus de 100W. Nutilisez PAS dampoules fluorescentes compactes de plus de 26W (100W ou quivalent). Nutilisez PAS dampoules halognes. Nutilisez PAS des ampoules col court ou de forme spciale. Les ampoules DEL peuvent causer des interfrences radio avec la tlcommande. Utiliser UNIQUEMENT les ampoules DEL recommandes ici: chamberlain.com/bulb. 1. Tirez la lentille vers le bas. 2. Insrez lampoule. 3. Fermez la lentille. ou o ou o ou o Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES causes par une porte de garage qui tombe Utilisez si possible la poigne de dclenchement durgence pour dgager le chariot UNIQUEMENT lorsque la porte de garage est FERME. Des ressorts faibles ou casss, ou une porte dsquilibre peuvent entraner une chute rapide et/ou inattendue dune porte ouverte. Nutilisez JAMAIS la poigne de dclenchement durgence avant que toutes les personnes et les obstacles aient t retirs du trajet quelle suivra. Nutilisez JAMAIS la poigne pour ouvrir ou fermer la porte. Si le nud de la corde se dfait, vous risquez de tomber. 1. Insrez une extrmit de la corde de dclenchement durgence travers la poigne. Vrifiez que NOTICE (AVIS) est lendroit. Fixez avec un nud simple un minimum de 2,5cm (1po) de lextrmit de la corde pour viter quelle glisse. 2. Insrez lautre extrmit de la corde de dclenchement durgence dans le trou du bras de dclenchement du chariot. Montez le dclenchement durgence porte de main, mais au moins 1,83 m (6 pi) au-dessus du sol, en vitant tout contact avec les vhicules pour viter un dclenchement accidentel, puis fixez-le avec un nud plat. REMARQUE : Si vous devez couper la corde de dclenchement durgence, arrtez lextrmit coupe avec une allumette ou un briquet pour viter quelle ne seffiloche. Vrifiez que la corde et la poigne de dclenchement durgence se trouvent au-dessus du toit de tous les vhicules pour viter tout enchevtrement ventuel. 17 Installation TAPE 8 Installer le support de porte ATTENTION Les portes de garage en fibre de verre, en aluminium ou en acier lger DEVRONT tre renforces AVANT linstallation du support de porte. Contactez le fabricant de la porte de garage ou le revendeur qui sest charg de linstallation pour obtenir des instructions sur un renfort douvre-porte ou un kit de renfort. Le fait de ne pas renforcer la section suprieure tel que requis par le fabricant de la porte risque dannuler la garantie de cette dernire. Un renfort horizontal et vertical est ncessaire pour les portes de garage lgres (fibre de verre, aluminium, acier, portes avec panneau de verre, etc.) (non fourni). Une entretoise de renfort horizontale doit tre suffisamment longue pour tre fixe deux ou trois supports verticaux. Un renfort vertical doit couvrir la hauteur du panneau suprieur. Contactez le fabricant de la porte de garage ou le revendeur qui sest charg de linstallation pour obtenir des instructions sur un renfort douvre-porte ou un kit de renfort. MATRIEL Vis autotaraudeuse 1/4po - 14x 5/8po Renfort horizontal Renfort vertical REMARQUE : De nombreux kits de renfort de porte permettent de fixer directement laxe paulement et le bras de porte. Dans ce cas, vous naurez pas besoin du support de porte; passez directement ltape suivante. FIGURE1 Renfort vertical FIGURE2 Renfort vertical OPTION A: PORTES SECTIONNELLES 1. Centrez le support de porte sur la ligne mdiane verticale que vous avez trace auparavant et utilise pour installer le support de linteau. Notez que le placement correct est vers le HAUT, tel quindiqu lintrieur du support. 2. Positionnez le bord suprieur du support entre 5 et 10cm (2et 4po) sous le bord suprieur de la porte OU directement sous tout support structurel du dessus de la porte. 3. Marquez des trous et percez-les, puis procdez linstallation comme suit, selon la construction de votre porte. Portes mtalliques ou lgres utilisant une querre verticale dans le support de panneau de porte et le support de porte:
Percez des trous de fixation de 3/16po. Fixez le support de porte laide des deux vis autotaraudeuses 1/4po - 14 x 5/8po. (Figure1) Dans lalternative, utilisez deux boulons de 5/16po - 18 x 2po, des rondelles darrt et des crous (non fournis). (Figure2) Portes mtalliques, isoles ou lgres renforces en usine:
Percez des trous de fixation de 3/16po. Fixez le support de porte laide des vis autotaraudeuses.
(Figure3) Portes en bois:
Utilisez les trous du support de porte en haut et bas ou de ct ct. Percez des trous de 5/16po travers la porte et fixez le support avec des boulons ordinaires 5/16po - 18x2po, des rondelles darrt et des crous (non fournis). (Figure4) REMARQUE : Les vis autotaraudeuses 1/4po - 14 x 5/8po ne sont pas destines tre utilises sur des portes en bois. Support de porte Vis autotaraudeuse FIGURE3 18 Ligne mdiane verticale de la porte de garage HAUT Ligne mdiane verticale de la porte de garage HAUT Matriel
(non fourni) FIGURE4 Matriel
(non fourni) Ligne mdiane verticale de la porte de garage Support de porte HAUT Bord intrieur de la porte ou du panneau de renfort HAUT Vis autotaraudeuse Ligne mdiane verticale de la porte de garage Installation TAPE 8 Installer le support de porte (suite) OPTION B - PORTES MONOBLOC 1. Centrez le support de porte sur le dessus de la porte, en ligne avec le support de linteau tel quillustr. 2. Marquez soit les trous de gauche et de droite, soit les trous du haut et du bas. Portes en mtal :
Mur du linteau Support 2x4
(Plafond fini) Support de linteau Percez des avant-trous de 3/16po et fixez le support avec les vis autotaraudeuses fournies. Support de porte Portes en bois :
Percez des trous de 5/16po et utilisez des boulons ordinaires, des rondelles darrt et des crous de 5/16po - 18 x 2po (non fournis) ou des tirefonds 5/16po x 1-1/2po (non fournis) selon vos besoins dinstallation. REMARQUE : Le support de porte peut tre install sur le bord suprieur de la porte si ncessaire pour votre installation. (Reportez-vous au dessin de placement optionnel en pointills.) Placement optionnel du support de porte Pour une porte sans bti apparent ou pour linstallation optionnelle, utilisez des tirefonds 5/16po x 1-1/2po (non fournis) pour fixer le support de porte. Ligne mdiane verticalede la porte degarage Porte en mtal Vis autotaraudeuse Porte en bois Support de porte Haut de la porte
( lintrieur du garage) Bord suprieur de la porte Emplacement facultatif Porte Support 19 Matriel (non fourni) Haut de la porte
( lintrieur du garage) Bord suprieur de la porte Emplacement facultatif Matriel (non fourni) Installation TAPE 9 Connecter le bras de porte au chariot Linstallation variera selon le type de porte de garage. Suivez les instructions qui sappliquent votre porte. OPTION A - PORTES SECTIONNELLES IMPORTANT : La rainure du bras de porte droit DOIT faire face loppos du bras de porte incurv. 1. Fermez la porte. Dconnectez le chariot en tirant sur la poigne de dclenchement durgence. Fixez le bras droit de la porte au chariot extrieur laide de laxe paulement. Fixez avec 2. lanneau de fixation. 3. Fixez le bras de porte incurv au support de porte laide de laxe paulement. Fixez avec 4. 5. lanneau de fixation. Rassemblez les sections des bras. Trouvez deux paires de trous qui salignent et joignez les sections. Slectionnez des trous aussi loigns que possible pour augmenter la rigidit du bras de porte et fixez-les laide des boulons, des crous et des rondelles darrt. Tirez la poigne de dclenchement durgence vers louvre-porte de garage jusqu ce que le bras de dclenchement du chariot soit horizontal. Le chariot se rengage automatiquement lorsque louvre-porte de garage est activ. REMARQUE : Si les trous du bras de porte incurv et du bras de porte droit ne salignent pas, inversez le bras de porte droit, slectionnez deux trous (aussi loigns que possible) et fixez-les laide des boulons, crous et rondelles darrt. Si le bras droit de la porte descend trop bas, vous pouvez couper 15cm (6po) de lextrmit solide. MATRIEL Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/4po Anneau de fixation Axe paulement 5/16pox1po Rondelle darrt 5/16po - 18 Boulon six pans 5/16po - 18 x 7/8po crou 5/16po - 18 Anneau de fixation Rondelle darrt crou Axe paulement 5/16pox1po Boulon six pans Coupez si ncessaire Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/4po Bras de porte droit (rainure tourne vers lextrieur) Bras de porte incurv 20 Installation TAPE 9 Connecter le bras de porte au chariot (suite) OPTION B - PORTES MONOBLOC IMPORTANT : La rainure du bras de porte droit DOIT faire face loppos du bras de porte incurv. 3. 1. Fermez la porte. Dconnectez le chariot en tirant sur la poigne de dclenchement durgence. Fixez le bras de porte droit et le bras de porte incurv ensemble la longueur la plus longue 2. possible (avec un chevauchement de 2 ou 3 trous) laide des boulons, crous et rondelles darrt. Fixez le bras de porte droit au support de porte laide de laxe paulement. Fixez avec lanneau de fixation. Fixez le bras de porte incurv au chariot laide de laxe paulement. Fixez avec lanneau de fixation. Tirez la poigne de dclenchement durgence vers louvre-porte de garage jusqu ce que le bras de dclenchement du chariot soit horizontal. 4. 5. MATRIEL Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/4po Anneau de fixation Axe paulement 5/16pox1po Rondelle darrt 5/16po - 18 Boulon six pans 5/16po - 18 x 7/8po crou 5/16po - 18 Bras de porte droit
(rainure tourne vers lextrieur) Bras de porte incurv Porte monobloc sans rail Anneau de fixation Anneau de fixation crou Rondelle darrt Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/4po Boulons six pans Porte monobloc avec rail Anneau de fixation Anneau de fixation crou Rondelle darrt Axe paulement 5/16po x 1-1/4po Boulons six pans 21 Axe paulement 5/16pox1po Axe paulement 5/16pox1po 1. Dnudez 6mm (1/4po) disolant une extrmit du fil et sparez les fils. 2. Connectez un fil chacune des deux vis larrire de la commande de porte. Les fils peuvent tre connects lune ou lautre des vis. 3. Montez la commande de la porte avec le matriel fourni. 1 2 3 6 mm (1/4po) Installation TAPE 10 Installer la commande de porte BOUTON POUSSOIR DE LA COMMANDE DE PORTE AVERTISSEMENT Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES par lectrocution:
Vrifiez que lalimentation nest PAS branche AVANT dinstaller la commande de porte. Connectez la commande de porte UNIQUEMENT aux fils basse tension de 12VOLTS. Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES causes par la fermeture dune porte de garage:
Installez la commande de porte porte de vue de la porte de garage, hors de porte des jeunes enfants, une hauteur minimale de 5pieds (1,5m) au-dessus du sol, des paliers, des marches ou de toute autre surface de marche adjacente, et loin de TOUTES les pices mobiles de la porte. Nautorisez JAMAIS des enfants utiliser ou jouer avec les boutons de commande de porte ou les metteurs de la tlcommande. Activez la porte UNIQUEMENT lorsquelle est clairement visible et correctement rgle, et quil ny a pas dobstacles au dplacement de la porte. Gardez TOUJOURS la porte de garage en vue jusqu ce quelle soit compltement ferme. Ne permettez JAMAIS quiconque de passer la ligne de la porte de garage lorsquelle est en train de se fermer. INTRODUCTION Installez la commande de porte porte de vue de la porte de garage une hauteur minimale de 5pieds (1,5m) au-dessus du sol, des paliers, des marches ou de toute autre surface de marche adjacente, hors de porte des jeunes enfants et loin des pices mobiles de la porte. REMARQUE: Il est possible que votre produit soit diffrent des illustrations. MATRIEL Vis 6 AB x 1-1/2po (2) Ancrages pour cloisons sches (2) 22 Installation PANNEAU DE COMMANDE PLUSIEURS FONCTIONS AVERTISSEMENT Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES par lectrocution:
Vrifiez que lalimentation nest PAS branche AVANT dinstaller la commande de porte.. Connectez la commande de porte UNIQUEMENT aux fils basse tension de 12VOLTS. Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES causes par la fermeture dune porte de garage:
Installez la commande de porte porte de vue de la porte de garage, hors de porte des jeunes enfants, une hauteur minimale de 5pieds (1,5m) au-dessus du sol, des paliers, des marches ou de toute autre surface de marche adjacente, et loin de TOUTES les pices mobiles de la porte. Nautorisez JAMAIS des enfants utiliser ou jouer avec les boutons de commande de porte ou les metteurs de la tlcommande. Activez la porte UNIQUEMENT lorsquelle est clairement visible et correctement rgle, et quil ny a pas dobstacles au dplacement de la porte. Gardez TOUJOURS la porte de garage en vue jusqu ce quelle soit compltement ferme. Ne permettez JAMAIS quiconque de passer la ligne de la porte de garage lorsquelle est en train de se fermer. INTRODUCTION Les anciennes commandes de porte Chamberlain et les produits de tiers ne sont pas compatibles. Installez la commande de porte porte de vue de la porte de garage, hors de porte des jeunes enfants, une hauteur minimale de 1,5m (5pi) au-dessus du sol, des paliers, des marches ou de toute autre surface de marche adjacente, et loin de TOUTES les pices mobiles de la porte. Pour les installations dune bote de commande, il nest pas ncessaire de percer des trous ou dinstaller des ancrages pour cloisons sches. Utilisez les trous existants de la bote de commande. REMARQUE: Il est possible que votre produit soit diffrent des illustrations. Vis 6-32x1po
(2) Ancrages pour cloisons sches (2) MATRIEL Vis 6ABx1po (2) 23 1. Dnudez 11mm (1/16po) disolant une extrmit du fil et sparez les fils. 2. Connectez un fil chacune des deux vis larrire de la commande de porte. Les fils peuvent tre connects lune ou lautre des vis. Si votre garage est pr-cbl pour la commande de porte, choisissez deux fils connecter et notez quels fils sont utiliss afin que les bons fils soient connects louvre-porte de garage dans une tape ultrieure. Installez la vis infrieure, en laissant 3mm (1/8po) dpasser du mur. 3. Marquez lemplacement du trou de montage infrieur et percez un trou de 5/32po. 4. 5. Positionnez le trou infrieur de la commande de porte sur la vis et faites-la glisser en place. 6. Soulevez la barre de pousse et marquez le trou suprieur. 7. Retirez la commande de porte du mur et percez un trou de 5/32po pour la vis du haut. 8. Positionnez le trou infrieur de la commande de porte sur la vis et faites-la glisser en place. Fixez la vis suprieure. 1 11mm (7/16po) 2 3 Mur 4-5 7 CLOISON SCHE BOTIER DE COMMANDE Ancrage pour cloison sche 6-32x1po 6ABx1po 8 6 CLOISON SCHE BOTIER DE COMMANDE Ancrage pour cloison sche 6-32x1po 6ABx1po Installation TAPE 11 Cbler la commande de porte louvre-porte de garage 1. Faites passer le fil blanc et rouge/blanc de la commande de porte louvre-porte de garage. Fixez le fil au mur et au plafond avec lagrafe (ne sapplique pas aux botes de commande ou aux installations pr-cbles). Ne percez pas le fil avec lagrafe car ceci risquerait de crer un court-circuit ou un circuit ouvert. 2. Dnudez 11mm (7/16po) disolant lextrmit du fil, prs de louvre-porte de garage. 3. Connectez le fil aux bornes rouge et blanche de louvre-porte de garage. Si votre garage est pr-cbl, veillez utiliser les mmes fils que ceux connects la commande de porte. Pour insrer ou librer les fils de la borne, enfoncez la languette avec la pointe dun tournevis. 1 3 MATRIEL Agrafe isole (non illustr) 2 11mm (7/16po) Agrafe Canal de fil E G U O R C N A L B TAPE 12 Fixer les tiquettes davertissement 1. Fixez ltiquette davertissement de pigeage sur le mur, prs de la commande de porte, avec des punaises ou des agrafes. Fixez ltiquette de test de dclenchement manuel/dinversion de scurit un endroit visible lintrieur de la porte de garage. 2. 24 Installation TAPE 13 Installer le Protector System AVERTISSEMENT Vrifiez que lalimentation nest PAS connecte louvre-porte de garage AVANT dinstaller le capteur dinversion de scurit. Pour viter des BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES en fermant la porte de garage:
Raccordez et alignez correctement le capteur dinversion de scurit. Ce dispositif de scurit requis NE DOIT PAS tre dsactiv. Installez le capteur dinversion de scurit de sorte que le faisceau ne soit PAS une HAUTEUR SUPRIEURE 15cm (6po) du sol du garage. IMPORTANT: Les capteurs dinversion de scurit DOIVENT tre connects et aligns correctement avant que louvre-porte de garage ne se dplace vers le bas. Le systme de protection comprend deux capteurs dinversion de scurit qui utilisent un faisceau lumineux pour empcher la fermeture de la porte de garage. Le capteur metteur (DEL orange) transmet le faisceau au capteur rcepteur (DEL verte) lorsque les deux sont aliments et aligns. Si un obstacle brise le faisceau lumineux pendant la fermeture de la porte, la porte sarrte, puis retourne en position compltement ouverte. En installant les capteurs dinversion de scurit, vrifiez ce qui suit:
Les capteurs sont installs LINTRIEUR du garage. Les lentilles des capteurs se font face. IMPORTANT : Ne laissez pas la lumire directe du soleil atteindre le capteur rcepteur (DEL verte). Le faisceau du capteur nest PAS une HAUTEUR SUPRIEURE 15cm (6po) du sol et le faisceau lumineux nest pas obstru. Capteur dinversion de scurit Zone de protection des faisceaux lumineux Capteur dinversion de scurit Vis six pans 10-24 (2) MATRIEL crou oreilles (2) Les capteurs dinversion de scurit sont conus pour se clipser sur le rail de la porte avec les supports de capteur fournis. Si le rail de porte ne supporte pas le support du capteur, une installation murale est recommande. Le faisceau du capteur ne doit PAS tre une HAUTEUR SUPRIEURE 15cm (6po) au-dessus du sol. INSTALLATION DU RAIL DE PORTE 1. Faites glisser les bras incurvs du support de capteur autour du bord du rail de porte. Enclenchez-le de manire ce que le support du capteur affleure le rail. 2. Faites glisser la vis six pans travers le capteur. 3. Fixez le capteur au support avec lcrou oreilles. Vrifiez que lobjectif nest pas obstru par le support. Rptez les tapes avec lautre capteur sur le rail de porte oppos. Les deux lentilles doivent se faire face. Rail de porte Porte de garage 3 crou oreilles 15cm (6po) max. 1 2 25 Installation TAPE 13 Installer le Protector System (suite) OPTION MURALE Assurez-vous que les supports de chaque ct sont loigns du rail de la porte et ont le mme dgagement afin que les capteurs salignent correctement. Si un dgagement supplmentaire est ncessaire, utilisez des supports dextension 041A5281-1 (non fournis) ou des blocs de bois. 1. Fixez le support du capteur contre le mur avec deux tirefonds (non fournis). 2. Faites glisser la vis six pans travers le capteur. 3. Fixez le capteur au support avec lcrou oreilles. Vrifiez que lobjectif nest pas obstru par le support. Rptez les tapes avec lautre capteur sur le ct oppos de la porte de garage. Les deux lentilles doivent se faire face. 1 Rail de porte Mur intrieur du garage Non fourni 2 3 OPTIONNEL OU crou oreilles 15cm
(6po) max. OPTION AU SOL 1. Mesurez la position des deux supports de capteur afin quils soient la mme distance du mur et sans obstruction. 2. Fixez le support au sol avec des ancrages bton (non fournis). 3. Faites glisser la vis six pans travers le capteur. 4. Fixez le capteur au support avec lcrou oreilles. Vrifiez que lobjectif nest pas obstru par le support. Rptez les tapes avec lautre capteur sur le ct oppos de la porte de garage. Les deux lentilles doivent se faire face. Mur intrieur du garage 2 Non fourni Rail de porte 4 crou oreilles 15cm (6po) max. 1 3 26 Installation TAPE 14 Cbler les capteurs dinversion de scurit Si votre garage a un cblage pr-install pour les capteurs dinversion de scurit, voir lOPTIONB INSTALLATION PR-CBLE, page29. OPTION A : INSTALLATION SANS PR-CBLAGE 1. Faites passer le fil des deux capteurs louvre-porte de garage. Fixez avec des agrafes mais NEpercez PAS le fil. 2. Sparez les fils du capteur et dnudez lisolant chaque extrmit. Torsadez les deux fils blancs ensemble. Torsadez ensuite les deux fils blanc/noir ensemble. 3. laide dun tournevis, enfoncez les languettes des bornes et insrez les fils blancs dans la borne blanche. Insrez les fils blanc/noir dans la borne grise. MATRIEL Agrafe isole (non illustr) 2 Agrafe 11mm (7/16po) E G U O R C N A L B C N A L B S I R G 1 3 27 Installation TAPE 14 Cbler les capteurs dinversion de scurit
(suite) OPTION B : INSTALLATION PRCBLE 1. 2. Coupez les fils du capteur, en vous assurant quil y a une longueur suffisante de fil pour atteindre les fils prinstalls du mur. Sparez les fils du capteur et dnudez lisolant chaque extrmit. Choisissez deux des fils prinstalls et dnudez lisolant chaque extrmit. Choisissez les fils prinstalls de la mme couleur pour chaque capteur. 3. Connectez les fils prinstalls aux fils du capteur avec des serre-fils en vous assurant que les 4. 5. couleurs correspondent pour chaque capteur. Au niveau de louvre-porte de garage, dnudez lextrmit des fils connects auparavant aux capteurs. Torsadez les fils de mme couleur ensemble. laide dun tournevis, enfoncez les languettes des bornes et insrez la couleur du fil connect au fil blanc du capteur dans la borne blanche. Insrez lautre couleur de fil connect au fil blanc/
noir du capteur dans la borne grise. Fils pr-
installs 11mm (7/16po) Fils du capteur dinversion de scurit Serre-fils (non fournis) Fils du capteur dinversion de scurit Blanc Blanc/noir Fils pr-installs Canal de fil Fils pr-installs jaune (par exemple) violet (par exemple) Violet Jaune Jaune Violet 11mm (7/16po) S I R G C N A L B 28 Installation TAPE 15 Connecter lalimentation IL EXISTE DEUX OPTIONS POUR CONNECTER LALIMENTATION :
AVERTISSEMENT OPTION A - CBLAGE TYPIQUE 1. Branchez louvre-porte de garage dans une prise de courant mise la terre. 2. NE PAS faire fonctionner louvre-porte de garage ce moment-l. Pour viter les risques de BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES par lectrocution ou incendie:
Assurez-vous que le courant nest PAS connect louvre-porte, et dbranchez le courant du circuit AVANT de retirer le couvercle pour tablir une connexion permanente. Linstallation et le cblage de la porte de garage DOIVENT tre conformes TOUS les codes lectriques et de construction locaux. Nutilisez JAMAIS de rallonge, dadaptateur 2fils ou ne modifiez en AUCUN cas la fiche pour ladapter la prise. Assurez-vous que louvre-porte est mis la terre. OPTION B - CBLAGE PERMANENT Si un cblage permanent est requis par votre code local, consultez la procdure suivante. Pour effectuer une connexion permanente travers le trou de 7/8pouces dans le haut de lunit moteur (selon le code local):
1. Retirez les vis du couvercle de lunit moteur et mettez le couvercle de ct. 2. Retirez le cordon trois broches qui y est attach. 3. Connectez le fil noir (phase) la vis de la borne en laiton; le fil blanc (neutre) la vis de la borne argente; et le fil de terre la vis de terre verte. Louvre-porte doit tre mis la terre. Pour viter les difficults dinstallation, assurez-vous de ne pas faire fonctionner louvre-porte ce moment-l. Pour rduire le risque de choc lectrique, votre ouvre-porte de garage est quip dune fiche de type mise la terre avec une troisime goupille de mise la terre. Cette fiche rentre seulement dans une prise de terre. Si la fiche ne rentre pas dans la prise, communiquez avec un lectricien qualifi pour faire installer une prise adquate. 4. Rinstallez le couvercle. Onglet de terre Vis de terre verte Fil de terre Fil blanc Fil noir 29 Installation TAPE 16 Aligner les capteurs dinversion de scurit IMPORTANT: Les capteurs dinversion de scurit DOIVENT tre connects et aligns correctement avant que louvre-porte de garage ne se dplace vers le bas. Lorsque louvre-porte de garage est aliment en lectricit, vrifiez les capteurs dinversion de scurit. Si les capteurs sont aligns et cbls correctement, les deux voyants DEL sallument en continu. DPANNAGE DU CAPTEUR DE SCURIT Si lun des deux voyants des capteurs est teint, le capteur nest pas aliment :
1. Vrifiez que louvre-porte de garage est aliment en lectricit. 2. Vrifiez que le fil du capteur nest pas court-circuit ou cass. 3. Vrifiez que les capteurs sont correctement cbls; les fils blancs sur la borne blanche et les fils blancs/noirs sur la borne grise. 1 3 2 Zone de protection des faisceaux lumineux Capteur denvoi - Voyant DEL ambre Pour aligner les capteurs dinversion de scurit :
Capteur de rception - LED verte Un autocollant est coll au dos du capteur de rception. 1. Desserrez les crous oreilles. 2. Ajustez les capteurs vers le haut ou vers le bas jusqu ce que les deux voyants DEL sallument de manire continue, indiquant lalignement. 3. Serrez lcrou oreilles pour fixer le capteur. E G U O R C N A L B I S R G Si le voyant vert du capteur rcepteur clignote, les capteurs sont obstrus ou mal aligns :
1. Vrifiez que le faisceau lumineux du capteur nest pas obstru. 2. Alignez les capteurs. 3. Si le capteur de rception (DEL vert) fait face la lumire directe du soleil, interchangez le capteur de rception avec le capteur denvoi et rptez lTAPE12 de linstallation Protector System, page27 pour garantir le bon fonctionnement. TAPE 17 Sassurer que la commande de la porte est correctement cble Si la commande de porte a t installe et cble correctement, la DEL de commande sur le panneau de commande clignotera ou la DEL derrire le bouton-poussoir clignotera si linstallation a t effectue correctement. crou oreilles 30 Ajustements Introduction Si le capteur dinversion de scurit nest pas install correctement, les personnes (en particulier les jeunes enfants) peuvent SUBIR DES BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES par une porte de garage qui se ferme. Un rglage incorrect des limites de dplacement de la porte de garage empchera le bon fonctionnement du systme dinversion de scurit. Aprs TOUT rglage, le systme dinversion de scurit DOIT tre test. La porte DOIT sinverser au contact dun objet dune hauteur de 3,8cm (1-1/2po) (ou un 2x4 pos plat) sur le sol. Pour viter dendommager les vhicules, assurez-vous que la porte compltement ouverte offre un espace suffisant. Louvre-porte de votre garage est conu avec des commandes lectroniques pour faciliter la configuration et les rglages. HAUT (ouvrir) BAS (fermer) PORTES DUNE SEULE PICE UNIQUEMENT Lors du rglage du dplacement vers le haut dune porte une seule pice, assurez-vous que la porte nest pas incline vers larrire lorsquelle est compltement ouverte (HAUT). Si la porte est incline vers larrire, cela provoquera des secousses inutiles lors de louverture ou de la fermeture de la porte. Correct Incorrect Bouton de programmation Les boutons de programmation sont situs sur le panneau latral gauche de louvre-porte de garage et sont utiliss pour programmer le dplacement. Pendant la programmation, les boutons flchs vers le HAUT et le BAS peuvent tre utiliss pour dplacer la porte selon vos besoins. Bouton vers le HAUT Bouton de rglage Bouton vers le BAS Bouton de PROGRAMMATION 31 5 Lorsque la porte est dans la position BASSE souhaite, appuyez et relchez le bouton de rglage. Les lumires de louvre-porte de garage clignoteront deux fois. Le programme du dplacement est maintenant termine. Siles lumires de louvre-porte de garage clignotent 5fois, laprogrammation est termine et les limites de dplacement nont pas t rgles. Veuillez redmarrer le processus de la programmation du dplacement. 2 Rgler la force automatique Lorsque les positions de monte et de descente ont t rgles manuellement, les capteurs dinversion de scurit se reconnectent et deviennent oprationnels. Louvre-porte entre ensuite dans une opration de dtection de force en dplaant automatiquement la porte pour louvrir et la fermer. Louvre-porte de garage met une alerte sonore et visuelle avant douvrir et de fermer automatiquement la porte. Louvre-porte de garage mettra trois bips, confirmant que la configuration de la force automatique sest droule avec succs. Le rglage est termin. Si vous entendez un long bip aprs que la porte ait tent de se dplacer, cela signifie que le rglage de la force automatique ne sest pas droul correctement. Veuillez recommencer ltape1 de Programmer le dplacement. Ajustements 1 Programmer le dplacement AVERTISSEMENT Si le capteur dinversion de scurit nest pas install correctement, les personnes (en particulier les jeunes enfants) peuvent SUBIR DES BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES par une porte de garage qui se ferme. Un rglage incorrect des limites de dplacement de la porte de garage empchera le bon fonctionnement du systme dinversion de scurit. Aprs TOUT rglage, le systme dinversion de scurit DOIT tre test. La porte DOIT sinverser au contact dun objet dune hauteur de 2cm (1-1/2po) (ou un 2x4 pos plat) sur le sol. Remarque: Pendant la programmation, les boutons flchs vers le HAUT et vers le BAS peuvent tre utiliss pour dplacer la porte selon les besoins. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton de rglage et maintenez-le enfonc jusqu ce que le bouton flch vers le HAUT commence clignoter et/ou quun bip se fasse entendre. Les capteurs dinversion de scurit seront dconnects pendant le processus de programmation du dplacement. 2 Appuyez et maintenez le bouton flch vers le HAUT jusqu ce que la porte soit dans la position OUVERTE souhaite. 3 Lorsque la porte est dans la position souhaite, appuyez et relchez le bouton de rglage. Les lumires de louvre-porte de garage clignoteront deux fois et le bouton flch vers le BAS commencera clignoter. 4 Appuyez et maintenez le bouton flch vers le BAS jusqu ce que la porte soit dans la position BASSE souhaite. 32 Ajustements 3 Tester le systme dinversion de scurit 4 Tester le Protector System AVERTISSEMENT Si le capteur dinversion de scurit nest pas install correctement, les personnes (en particulier les jeunes enfants) peuvent SUBIR DES BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES par une porte de garage qui se ferme. Le systme dinversion de scurit DOIT tre test tous les mois. Aprs TOUT rglage, le systme dinversion de scurit DOIT tre test. La porte DOIT sinverser au contact dun objet de 3,8cm (1-1/2po) de haut (ou 2x4 pos plat) sur le sol. AVERTISSEMENT Si le capteur dinversion de scurit nest pas install correctement, les personnes (en particulier les jeunes enfants) peuvent SUBIR DES BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES par une porte de garage qui se ferme. 1 Ouvrez la porte. Placez un obstacle sur le chemin de la porte. 1 La porte tant compltement ouverte, placez une planche de 3,8cm (1 1/2pouce) ou un 2x4 pos plat sur le sol, centr(e) sous la porte du garage. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton poussoir de la tlcommande pour fermer la porte. La porte ne bougera pas de plus de 2,5cm (1po). 2 La porte tant compltement ouverte, placez une planche de 3,8cm (1 1/2pouce) ou un 2x4 pos plat sur le sol, centr(e) sous la porte du garage. Louvre-porte de garage ne se fermera pas partir dune tlcommande si le tmoin lumineux de lun ou lautre des capteurs est teint (ce qui vous avertit du fait que le capteur est mal align ou obstru). Si louvre-porte de garage ferme la porte lorsque le capteur dinversion de scurit est obstru (et que les capteurs ne sont pas plus de 15cm [6po] du sol), appelez un technicien qualifi en systmes de portes. Si la porte sarrte mais ne se rouvre pas:
1. 2. Rptez la programmation du dplacement (voir ltape de rglage1) ;
Rptez le test dinversion de scurit. Si le test continue dchouer, appelez un technicien qualifi en systmes de portes. 33 Commande de lapplication myQ Connectez-vous avec votre tlphone intelligent*
VOUS AUREZ BESOIN:
Un tlphone intelligent, une tablette ou un ordinateur portable compatible Wi-Fi Une connexion Internet large bande Signal Wi-Fi dans le garage (2,4GHz, 802,11b/g/n requis), voir la page5 Mot de passe de votre rseau domestique (le compte principal du routeur; pas le rseau pour invits)) Numro de srie myQ, situ sur louvre-porte de garage TLCHARGER LAPPLICATION myQ POUR CRER UN COMPTE ET SE CONNECTER Ouvrez et fermez votre porte, recevez des alertes et dfinissez des horaires partir de nimporte o. Les ouvre-porte de garage intelligents connects Reoivent aussi des mises jour logicielles pour sassurer que louvre-porte puisse utiliser les plus rcentes caractristiques de fonctionnement. Louvre-porte de garage doit effectuer un cycle complet avant dactiver la programmation Wi-Fi. 1. Tlchargez lapplication myQ App. 2. Crez un compte et connectez-vous. Si lapplication myQ est dj installe:
1. Vrifiez que votre appareil mobile possde le plus rcent logiciel. 2. Tlchargez la dernire version de lapplication myQ. Pour plus dinformation sur la connexion de votre ouvre-porte de garage, consultez le site support. chamberlaingroup.com. Remarques Pour effacer les paramtres Wi-Fi de louvre-porte, voir page39. Google Play et le logo Google Play sont des marques de commerce de Google LLC. LApp Store et les logos Apple et App Store sont des marques commerciales dApple Inc.
*Le contrle par tlphone intelligent nest pas disponible avec les modles C2102 et D2101. Statut Wi-Fi DELDEL Bleu Bleu + Vert Vert 34 Bouton dapprent-
issage DEL Un voyant DEL situ sur louvre-porte de garage indiquera le statut du Wi-Fi. Voir le tableau ci-dessous. Dfinition Dfinition
- Le Wi-Fi nest pas activ. teint teint Clignotant Clignotant Allum en continu Allum en continu
- Louvre-porte de garage est en mode dapprentissage Wi-Fi.
- Lappareil mobile est connect louvre-porte de garage. Clignotant Clignotant
- Tentative de connexion au routeur. Clignotant Clignotant Allum en continu Allum en continu
- Tentative de connexion au serveur Internet.
- Le Wi-Fi a t configur et louvre-porte de garage est connect Internet. Fonctionnement CONSIGNES DE SCURIT IMPORTANTES Pour rduire le risque de BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES :
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. LISEZ ET SUIVEZ TOUS LES AVERTISSEMENTS ET TOUTES LES INSTRUCTIONS. Gardez TOUJOURS les tlcommandes hors de porte des enfants. Ne permettez JAMAIS aux enfants de manipuler ou de jouer avec les boutons-poussoirs ou les tlcommandes de la porte de garage. Activez la porte UNIQUEMENT lorsquelle est clairement visible et rgle correctement, et quil ny a pas dobstacles son dplacement. Gardez TOUJOURS la porte de garage en vue et loin des personnes et des objets jusqu ce quelle soit compltement ferme. NE TRAVERSEZ JAMAIS LA PORTE LORSQUELLE EST EN MOUVEMENT. PERSONNE NE DEVRAIT PASSER SOUS UNE PORTE ARRTE OU PARTIELLEMENT OUVERTE. Dans la mesure du possible, utilisez UNIQUEMENT la poigne de dclenchement durgence pour dsengager le chariot lorsque la porte du garage est FERME. Soyez prudent lorsque vous utilisez cette poigne pendant que la porte est ouverte. Des ressorts abms ou une porte mal quilibre pourraient entraner une chute rapide ou inattendue dune porte ouverte et augmenter le risque de BLESSURE GRAVE voire MORTELLE. Nutilisez JAMAIS la poigne de dclenchement durgence si lentre de la porte de garage est obstrue. Nutilisez JAMAIS la poigne pour ouvrir ou fermer la porte du garage. Si le nud de la corde se dfait, vous risquez de tomber. 9. Aprs TOUT rglage, le systme dinversion de scurit DOIT tre test. 10. Le systme dinversion de scurit DOIT tre test tous les mois. La porte DOIT sinverser au contact dun objet de 3,8cm de haut (ou 2x4 pos plat) sur le sol. Une installation inadquate de louvre-porte de garage augmente le risque de BLESSURE GRAVE ou FATALE. 11. GARDEZ TOUJOURS LA PORTE DE GARAGE CORRECTEMENT CALIBRE (voir page3). Une porte mal quilibre risque de ne PAS sinverser lorsque cela est ncessaire et pourrait entraner des BLESSURES GRAVES voir MORTELLES. 12. TOUTES les rparations de cbles, ressorts et autre matriel, qui sont TOUS sous une tension EXTRME, DOIVENT tre effectues par un technicien en systmes de portes qualifi. 13. Dbranchez TOUJOURS lalimentation lectrique de louvre-porte de garage AVANT deffectuer TOUTE rparation ou denlever les recouvrements. 14. Ce systme de commande est quip dune fonction de marche sans surveillance. La porte pourrait bouger de faon inattendue. NE TRAVERSEZ JAMAIS LA PORTE LORSQUELLE EST EN MOUVEMENT. 15. NINSTALLEZ PAS cet appareil sur une porte dune seule pice si vous utilisez des dispositifs ou des fonctionnalits permettant une fermeture sans surveillance. Les dispositifs et fonctionnalits sans surveillance doivent tre utiliss UNIQUEMENT avec des portes sectionnelles. 16. CONSERVER CES INSTRUCTIONS. Utilisation de votre ouvre-porte de garage Louvre-porte de garage peut tre activ par une commande de porte murale, une tlcommande, un systme daccs sans cl sans-fil ou lapplication myQ. Lorsque la porte est ferme et que louvre-porte de garage est activ, la porte souvre. Si la porte entre en contact avec un obstacle pendant louverture, la porte sarrte, louvre-porte met des bips et les lumires clignotent 5fois. Lorsque la porte est dans une position autre que ferme et que louvre-porte de garage est activ, la porte se ferme. Si la porte de garage entre en contact avec un obstacle pendant la fermeture, la porte sinverse, louvre-porte met des bips et les lumires clignotent 5fois. Cependant, vous pouvez fermer la porte si vous maintenez le bouton de la commande de la porte ou du systme daccs sans cl jusqu ce que la porte soit compltement ferme. Les capteurs dinversion de scurit naffectent pas le cycle douverture. Le capteur dinversion de scurit doit tre connect et align correctement avant que louvre-porte de garage fasse descendre la porte. Les lumires de louvre-porte de garage sallument lorsque louvre-porte est initialement branch, que louvre-porte est activ ou que le courant est rtabli aprs une interruption. Les lumires de louvre-porte de garage steignent automatiquement aprs une dure dtermine. Pour rgler les paramtres dclairage, voir Utilisation de votre commande de porte. 35 Fonctionnement Utilisation de la commande de votre porte PANNEAU DE COMMANDE MULTIFONCTION Barre de pousse DEL de commande Bouton dapprentissage Bouton de verrouillage Bouton dclairage SYNCHRONIZER LA COMMANDE DE PORTE : Pour synchroniser la commande de la porte louvre-porte du garage, appuyez sur la barre de pousse jusqu ce que louvre-porte du garage se mette en fonction (cela peut prendre jusqu trois pousses). Essayez la commande de la porte en appuyant sur la barre de pousse, chaque pousse sur la barre de pousse activera louvre-porte du garage. BARRE DE POUSSE : Appuyez sur la barre de pousse pour ouvrir ou fermer la porte. BOUTON LEARN (apprentissage) : Utilisez-le pour programmer des tlcommandes compatibles, des entres sans cl sans fil et des dispositifs myQ louvre-porte de garage. BOUTON LOCK (verrouillage) : Empche les tlcommandes de fonctionner, tout en permettant lactivation partir de la commande de louvre-porte ou systme daccs sans cl. (Le rglage dusine est dsactiv.) Activer:
Appuyez et maintenez le bouton LOCK pendant deux secondes. Le voyant DEL clignote tant que la fonction de verrouillage est active. Dsactiver:
Appuyez et maintenez le bouton LOCK pendant deux secondes. Le voyant DEL cesse de clignoter et le fonctionnement normal reprend. BOUTON LIGHT : Allume ou teint les lumires de louvre-
porte de garage. Les lumires restent allumes pendant 4minutes et 30secondes (rglage usine). Le bouton LIGHT ne permet pas de contrler les lumires lorsque la porte est en mouvement. Pour modifier la dure pendant laquelle les lumires restent allumes:
Appuyez sur le bouton LOCK et maintenez-le enfonc
(environ 10secondes) jusqu ce que les lumires de louvre-
porte de garage clignotent. Lintervalle de temps est indiqu par le nombre de clignotements de louvre-porte de garage:
1 clignotement reprsente 1-1/2minute 2 clignotements reprsentent 2-1/2minutes 3 clignotements reprsentent 3-1/2minutes 4 clignotements reprsentent 4-1/2minutes Pour passer le cycle des intervalles, rptez les tapes ci-dessus. Si la barre de pousse clignote continuellement, leverrouillage doit tre dsactiv. BOUTON POUSSOIR DE LA COMMANDE DE PORTE Bouton poussoir Bouton dclairage SYNCHRONIZER LA COMMANDE DE PORTE : Pour synchroniser la commande de la porte louvre-porte de garage, appuyez sur le bouton poussoir jusqu ce que louvre-
porte du garage se mette en fonction (cela peut prendre jusqu trois pousses). BOUTON-POUSSOIR : Enfoncez le bouton LIGHT pour allumer ou teindre les lumires de louvre-porte de garage. Lorsque les lumires sont allumes, elles le demeureront jusqu ce que le bouton LIGHT soit enfonc nouveau, ou jusqu ce que louvre-porte de garage soit activ. Une fois louvre-porte de garage activ, les lumires steignent aprs le dlai prcis (le paramtre rgl en usine est de 4minutes et demie). Le bouton LIGHT ne permet pas de contrler les lumires lorsque la porte est en mouvement. 36 Fonctionnement Tlcommande et entre sans cl LA TLCOMMANDE PRPROGRAMME COMPRISE, VOUS NAVEZ PAS BESOIN DE PROGRAMMER LA TLCOMMANDE. Pour ajouter ou reprogrammer une tlcommande, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Les tlcommandes plus anciennes de Chamberlain NE sont PAS compatibles. PROGRAMMATION AVEC LE PANNEAU DE COMMANDE MULTIFONCTIONNEL 1. Appuyez sur le bouton LEARN (apprentissage) sur la commande de la porte pour accder au mode de programmation. Le voyant DEL de la commande clignotera une Fois. 2. Appuyez nouveau sur le bouton LEARN (apprentissage), le voyant DEL de la commande clignotera nouveau. 3. Tlcommande : Appuyez sur le bouton de la commande que vous voulez utiliser pour faire fonctionner votre porte de garage. Entre sans cl : Entrez un numro didentification personnel (NIP) 4chiffres de votre choix sur le clavier du dispositif dentre sans cl. Ensuite, appuyez et maintenez le bouton ENTER (entre). PROGRAMMATION AU MOYEN DU BOUTON-POUSSOIR DE LA COMMANDE DE PORTE 1. Enfoncez le bouton LIGHT et le bouton-poussoir jusqu ce que la DEL du bouton-
poussoir commence clignoter. 2. Tlcommande : Appuyez sur le bouton de la tlcommande que vous voulez utiliser pour faire fonctionner votre porte de garage. Entre sans cl : Entrez un numro didentification personnel (NIP) 4chiffres de votre choix sur le clavier du dispositif dentre sans cl. Ensuite, appuyez et maintenez le bouton ENTER. Bouton poussoir Bouton dclairage PROGRAMMATION LAIDE DU BOUTON DE LOUVRE-PORTE DE GARAGE LEARN (APPRENTISSAGE) 1. Trouvez le bouton LEARN (apprentissage). 2. Appuyez et relchez immdiatement le bouton LEARN (apprentissage). Le VOYANT DEL LEARN restera allum pendant 30secondes. Pendant les 30 secondes... 3. Commande distance : Appuyez et maintenez la touche de la tlcommande que vous souhaitez utiliser. Entre sans cl : Saisissez un numro didentification personnel (NIP) 4chiffres de votre choix sur le clavier. Ensuite, appuyez et maintenez le bouton ENTER. Relchez le bouton lorsque les lumires de louvre-porte de garage clignotent ou vous entendez deux clics. 1-2 3 Bouton dapprentissage DEL dapprentissage i c i c C l C l OU NIP HomeLink Si votre vhicule est quip de HomeLink, vous aurez peut-tre besoin dun Compatibility Bridge
(non compris). Visitez bridge.chamberlain.com pour savoir si vous avez besoin dun Bridge (pont). OU Les lumires de louvre-porte de garage clignoteront (ou vous entendrez deux clics) lorsque le code est programm. Refaites les tapes pour programmer des tlcommandes ou des dispositifs dentre sans cl supplmentaires. Si la programmation ne fonctionne pas, suivez les tapes de la programmation en utilisant le bouton LEARN (apprentissage) de louvre-porte de garage. NIP 37 Fonctionnement Effacer la mmoire EFFACER TOUTES LES TLCOMMANDES ET LES ENTRES SANS CLS Appuyez et maintenez le bouton LEARN (apprentissage) sur louvre-porte jusqu ce que le voyant DEL LEARN steigne (environ 6secondes). Tous les codes de tlcommandes et des entres sans cl sont maintenant effacs. Reprogrammez tout accessoire que vous voulez utiliser. 1. EFFACER TOUS LES APPAREILS Y COMPRIS les accessoires compatibles myQ 1. Appuyez et maintenez le bouton LEARN (apprentissage) sur louvre-porte jusqu ce que le voyant DEL LEARN steigne (environ 6secondes). 2. Appuyez immdiatement sur le bouton LEARN (apprentissage) et maintenez-le enfonc jusqu ce que le voyant DEL LEARN steigne. Tous les codes sont maintenant supprims. Reprogrammez tout accessoire que vous voulez utiliser. SUPPRIMER LA CONNEXION DE LOUVRE-PORTE DE GARAGE DU RSEAU Wi-Fi DOMESTIQUE 1. Appuyez et maintenez le bouton noir de rglage sur louvre-porte de garage jusqu ce que vous entendiez trois bips (environ six secondes). Bouton dapprentissage Ouvrir la porte manuellement Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES causes par une porte de garage qui tombe:
Utilisez si possible la poigne de dclenchement durgence pour dgager le chariot UNIQUEMENT lorsque la porte de garage est FERME. Des ressorts faibles ou casss, ou une porte dsquilibre peuvent entraner une chute rapide et/ou inattendue dune porte ouverte. Nutilisez JAMAIS la poigne de dclenchement durgence avant que toutes les personnes et les obstacles aient t retirs du trajet quelle suivra. Nutilisez JAMAIS la poigne pour ouvrir ou fermer la porte. Si le nud de la corde se dfait, vous risquez de tomber. DCONNECTER LE CHARIOT 1. Si possible, la porte devrait tre ferme compltement. 2. Tirez sur la poigne de dclenchement durgence afin que le bras de dclenchement du chariot senclenche en position verticale. La porte peut maintenant tre monte et descendue aussi souvent que ncessaire. POUR RECONNECTER LE CHARIOT 1. Tirez la poignez de dclenchement vers louvre-porte de garage afin que le chariot senclenche en position horizontale. Le chariot se connectera nouveau la prochaine opration vers le HAUT ou le BAS, soit de faon manuelle soit en utilisant la commande de la porte ou la tlcommande. 38 AVIS: Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 du rglement de la FCC ainsi quavec le CNR exempt de licence dInnovation, Science et Dveloppement conomique Canada. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes: (1)cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrences nuisibles, et (2)cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent causer le fonctionnement indsirable de lappareil. Les modifications ou les changements non expressment approuvs par la partie responsable de la conformit peuvent annuler lautorit de lutilisateur utiliser lquipement. Cet appareil doit tre install pour quune distance minimum de 20cm (8po) soit maintenue entre les utilisateurs, les passants et lappareil. Cet appareil t test et sest avr conforme aux limites dun appareil numrique de classe B selon la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et des normes ICES dIndustrie Canada. Ces limites ont pour objet de fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut rayonner de lnergie radiofrquente et, sil nest pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, il risque de causer des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Toutefois, il nest pas possible de garantir labsence dinterfrences dans une installation particulire. Si cet quipement cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception radio ou TV, ce qui peut tre dtermin en lteignant puis en le rallumant, lutilisateur est invit essayer de corriger linterfrence en prenant au moins lune des mesures suivantes:
Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. loigner lappareil de lquipement ou du rcepteur. Brancher lquipement sur une prise correspondant un autre circuit que celui sur lequel le rcepteur est branch. Consulter le revendeur ou un technicien radio/TV pour obtenir de laide. Entretien Planification de lentretien TOUS LES MOIS Activez manuellement la porte. Si elle est dsquilibre ou plie, appelez un technicien qualifi en systmes de porte. Vrifiez que la porte ouvre et ferme au complet. Ajustez si ncessaire, voir page33. Testez le systme dinversion de scurit. Ajustez si ncessaire, voir page35. TOUS LES ANS Huilez les rouleaux, roulements et charnires de la porte. Louvre-porte de garage ne ncessite pas davantage de lubrification. Nappliquez pas de la graisse sur les rails de la porte. Testez la batterie de secours et songez la remplacer pour vous assurer que louvre-porte de garage fonctionnera en cas de panne dlectricit; voir la page36 pour tester la batterie de secours.Batterie de la tlcommande AVERTISSEMENT Pour viter dventuelles BLESSURES GRAVES voire MORTELLES:
Ne laissez JAMAIS les jeunes enfants sapprocher des piles. En cas dingestion de piles, consultez immdiatement un mdecin. Pour rduire les risques dincendie, dexplosion ou de brlures chimiques respectez ce qui suit:
Remplacez les piles seulement avec des piles bouton CR2032 de 3V. Veillez ne PAS recharger, dmonter, chauffer plus de 100C (212 F) ou incinrer les piles. La batterie au lithium CR2032 de 3V devrait fonctionner jusqu 3ans. Si la batterie est faible, le voyant DEL de la tlcommande ne clignotera pas lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton. Pour remplacer la batterie, ouvrez en cartant le botier au milieu (1), ensuite de chaque ct (2 et 3) avec le clip de pare-soleil. Remplacez les batteries seulement avec des batteries CR2032 de 3V. Insrez le ct positif de la batterie vers le haut. Disposez des vieilles batteries de faon approprie. 3 1 2 39 Dpannage Tableau des diagnostics Votre ouvre-porte de garage est programm pour sautodiagnostiquer. Les flches vers le HAUT et le BAS de louvre-porte de garage clignotent pour indiquer les codes de diagnostic. CODE DE DIAGNOSTIQUE SYMPTME SOLUTION Clignotements Clignotements 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 5 Louvre-porte de garage ne ferme pas la porte. Louvre-porte de garage ne ferme pas la porte. Les capteurs dinversion de scurit ne sont pas installs, connects ou les fils sont peut-tre coups. Inspectez les fils des capteurs pour vous assurer quils sont connects et ne sont pas coups. Il y a un court circuit ou une inversion du fil des capteurs dinversion de scurit. Inspectez le fil du capteur de scurit toutes les agrafes et les points de connexion, remplacez le fil ou corrigez la situation, au besoin. La commande de la porte ne fonctionne pas. Les fils de la commande de la porte sont court-circuits ou la commande de la porte fait dfaut. Inspectez le fil du capteur de scurit toutes les agrafes et les points de connexion, remplacez le fil ou corrigez la situation, au besoin. Louvre-porte de garage ne ferme pas la porte. La porte bouge de 15-20cm (6-8po), sarrte et remonte. Les capteurs dinversion de scurit ne sont pas aligns correctement ou taient momentanment obstrus. Alignez les deux capteurs correctement jusqu ce que les deux voyants DEL soient allums en continu. Assurez-vous que rien nest suspendu ou install sur la porte de faon interrompre le chemin du capteur lorsque la porte ferme. Ouvrez et fermez la porte manuellement. Vrifiez si elle est plie ou sil y a des obstructions comme un ressort bris ou le dispositif de verrouillage et corrigez la situation, au besoin. Vrifiez les connexions des fils au module de dplacement et la carte mre. Remplacez le module de dplacement, au besoin. Il ny a aucun mouvement, seulement un clic. Ouvrez et fermez la porte manuellement. Vrifiez si elle est plie ou sil y a des obstructions comme un ressort bris ou le dispositif de verrouillage et corrigez la situation, au besoin. Remplacez la carte mre si ncessaire. Louvre-porte met un son de bourdonnement pendant 1 2secondes sans mouvement. Ouvrez et fermez la porte manuellement. Vrifiez si elle est plie ou sil y a des obstructions comme un ressort bris ou le dispositif de verrouillage et corrigez la situation, au besoin. Remplacez le moteur, au besoin. 6 La porte continue glisser aprs stre arrte compltement. Programmez la course jusqu la position de glissement ou faites quilibrer la porte par un technicien qualifi en systmes de portes. 1-5 Aucun mouvement ou son. Remplacez la carte mre. 2 3 Incapacit rgler le dplacement ou garder la position. Vrifiez le module de dplacement pour avoir le bon assemblage, remplacez-le, au besoin. La DEL de statut de la batterie clignote constamment en vert. Erreur du circuit de la batterie de secours, remplacez la carte mre. 1-4 La porte bouge, sarrte et change de direction. Louvre-porte met des bips et les voyants clignotent. Ouvrez et fermez manuellement la porte. Vrifiez si elle est plie ou sil y a des obstructions comme un ressort bris ou le dispositif de verrouillage et corrigez la situation, au besoin. Si la porte plie, ou colle, communiquez avec un technicien qualifi en systmes de portes. Si la porte ne plie pas ni ne colle, essayez de reprogrammer le dplacement, voir Programmer le dplacement, page31. 5 6 Louvre-porte fonctionne environ pour un dplacement de 15-
20cm (6-8po), sarrte et change la direction du dplacement. Erreur de communication avec le module de dplacement. Vrifiez les connexions du module de dplacement, remplacez le module de dplacement, au besoin. Louvre-porte de garage ne ferme pas la porte. Les capteurs dinversion de scurit ne sont pas aligns correctement ou taient momentanment obstrus. Alignez correctement les deux capteurs pour vous assurer que les deux voyants DEL sont allums en continu et ne clignotent pas. Assurez-vous que rien nest suspendu ou install sur la porte de faon interrompre le chemin du capteur lorsque la porte ferme. 40 Dpannage Dpannage supplmentaire Mon ouvre-porte de garage met un bip et les lumires clignotent avant que la porte ferme:
Louvre-porte de garage a t activ par lentremise dun dispositif ou dune fonction, comme une minuterie de fermeture ou un moniteur de porte de garage. Mon ouvre-porte de garage sarrte, la poste change de direction, il met des bips et les voyants clignotent. Vrifiez si la porte est plie, ou obstrue tout au long du rail jusquau sol du garage. Ma tlcommande nactive pas la porte de garage:
Vrifiez que la fonction de verrouillage nest pas active sur la commande de la porte. Reprogrammez la commande de la porte. Si la tlcommande nactive toujours pas la porte, vrifiez les codes de diagnostiques pour vous assurer que louvre-porte de garage fonctionne correctement. Dpannsage du Wi-Fi Louvre-porte de garage naccde pas au mode dapprentissage Wi-Fi:
Aprs linstallation initiale de louvre-porte de garage, ce dernier doit effectuer un cycle complet
(ouverture et fermeture) avant que le mode dapprentissag Wi-Fi puisse tre activ. Sil y a rcemment eu une panne dlectricit, louvre-porte de garage doit effectuer un cycle complet avant que le mode dapprentissage Wi-Fi puisse tre activ. Voir la page37 pour activer le mode dapprentissage Wi-Fi. Si votre bouton de rglage noir nest pas dun vert continu, visitez le support.chamberlaingroup.com. Le Homelink de mon vhicule ne se programme pas avec mon ouvre-porte de garage :
Pour certains vhicules, il pourrait tre ncessaire dinstaller un pont de compatibilit (non compris). Visitez bridge.chamberlain.com pour savoir si vous avez besoin dun Bridge (pont). La tlcommande de mon voisin ouvre ma porte de garage :
Effacez la mmoire de votre ouvre-porte de garage et reprogrammez la ou les tlcommandes. Ma porte ne se ferme pas:
Le capteur dinversion de scurit doit tre connect et align correctement avant que louvre-porte de garage fasse descendre la porte. Les voyants DEL du capteur de scurit ne sallument pas :
Si les voyants DEL du capteur ne sallume pas en continu lorsque louvre-porte est activ, voir DPANNAGE DU CAPTEUR DE SCURIT, page32. Vrifiez si la porte est plie, ou obstrue tout au long du rail jusquau sol du garage. Le capteur dinversion de scurit doit tre connect et align correctement avant que louvre-porte de garage ne se dplace dans le sens de la descente. o Vrifiez que les capteurs dinversion de scurit sont installs et aligns correctement et quils ne sont pas obstrus. o Si le capteur de rception (voyant DEL vert) fait directement face la lumire du soleil, changez le capteur de rception avec le capteur denvoi pour que le capteur de rception ne soit pas directement sous la lumire du soleil. 41 Garantie Coordonnes de contact ARRTEZ!
Louvre-porte de garage ne fonctionne PAS tant que les capteurs dinversion de scurit ne sont pas installs et aligns correctement. Visitez nous en ligne :
support.chamberlaingroup.com GARANTIE LIMITE CHAMBERLAIN The Chamberlain Group LLC (le Vendeur) garantit au premier acheteur au dtail que ce produit install pour la premire fois dans sa rsidence sera libre de dfauts de matriel, de main-duvre pendant la priode prcise dfinie ci-dessous (Priode de la garantie). La priode de garantie commence partir de la date de lachat. Le bon fonctionnement de ce produit dpend du respect des instructions en ce qui a trait linstallation, le fonctionnement, lentretien et les tests. Le fait de ne pas se conformer strictement ces instructions annulera la prsente garantie limite dans son intgralit. Si, pendant la priode de la garantie limite, ce produit semble prsenter un dfaut qui est couvert par cette garantie limite, visitez chamberlain.com, avant de dmonter ce produit. Vous serez avis des instructions de dsassemblage et dexpdition. Vous pourrez ensuite envoyer le produit ou ses pices en port pay et assur selon les instructions de notre centre de services pour la rparation sous garantie. Veuillez inclure une brve description du problme et la preuve dachat comportant une date avec tout produit retourn pour rparation sous garantie. Les produits retourns au Vendeur pour rparation en vertu de la garantie et dont la dfectuosit et la couverture de la garantie sont confirms ds la rception par le Vendeur seront rpars ou remplacs ( lentire discrtion du Vendeur) sans frais pour vous et retourns en envoi pr-pay. Les pices dfectueuses seront rpares ou remplaces avec des pices neuves ou remises neuf la seule discrtion du vendeur. [Vous tes responsable de tout cot de dsinstallation ou dinstallation du produit ou de toute pice.]
TOUTE GARANTIE TACITE POUR CE PRODUIT, Y COMPRIS SANS SY LIMITER, TOUTE GARANTIE TACITE DE QUALIT COMMERCIALE ET DADAPTATION UNE QUELCONQUE UTILISATION, EST LIMITE LA DURE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITE CI-DESSUS POUR LES PICES CONNEXES ET LES GARANTIES NON TACITES EXISTERONT OU SERONT APPLIQUES APRS CETTE PRIODE. Certains tats et Provinces ne permettent pas de limiter la dure dune garantie implicite, de sorte que la limitation ci-dessus peut ne pas sappliquer vous. LA PRSENTE GARANTIE LIMITE NE COUVRE PAS LES DOMMAGES NON-DFECTUEUX, LES DOMMAGES CAUSS PAR UNE INSTALLATION, UNE UTILISATION OU UN ENTRETIEN INAPPROPRIS (DONT, SANS TOUEFOIS SY LIMITER, UN ABUS, UNE UTILISATION INCORRECTE, UN MANQUE DENTRETIEN RAISONNABLE ET NCESSAIRE, DES RPARATIONS NON AUTORISES OU TOUTE MODIFICATION DE CE PRODUIT), LES FRAIS DE MAIN-DUVRE POUR LA RINSTALLATION DUNE UNIT RPARE OU REMPLACE, LE REMPLACEMENT DARTICLES CONSOMMABLES (PAR EXEMPLE, LES PILES DES TLCOMMANDES ET LES AMPOULES), OU LES UNITS INSTALLES POUR UN USAGE NON RSIDENTIEL. LA PRSENTE GARANTIE LIMITE NE COUVRE PAS LES PROBLMES LIS LA PORTE DE GARAGE OU LA QUINCAILLERIE DE LA PORTE DE GARAGE, Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS SY LIMITER, LES RESSORTS DE LA PORTE, LES ROULEAUX DE LA PORTE, LALIGNEMENT DE LA PORTE OU LES CHARNIRES. LA PRSENTE GARANTIE LIMITE NE COUVRE PAS NON PLUS LES PROBLMES CAUSS PAR DES INTERFRENCES. EN AUCUN CAS, LE VENDEUR NE POURRA TRE TENU RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES CONSCUTIFS, ACCIDENTELS OU SPCIAUX LIS LUTILISATION OU LIMPOSSIBILIT DUTILISER CE PRODUIT. EN AUCUN CAS, LA RESPONSABILIT DU VENDEUR EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE GARANTIE, DE RUPTURE DE CONTRAT, DE NGLIGENCE OU DE RESPONSABILIT STRICTE NE POURRA DPASSER LE COT DU PRODUIT COUVERT PAR LES PRSENTES. PERSONNE NEST AUTORIS ASSUMER EN NOTRE NOM QUELQUE AUTRE RESPONSABILIT RELATIVE AVEC LA VENTE DE CE PRODUIT. Certains tats et Provinces nautorisant pas lexclusion ou la limitation des dommages conscutifs, accessoires ou spciaux, il est possible que la limitation ou lexclusion susmentionne ne sapplique pas vous. Cette garantie vous donne des droits lgaux spcifiques et vous pouvez galement avoir dautres droits, qui varient dune province lautre. 42 Guide de scurit et dentretien de louvre-porte de garage automatique Scurit de louvre-porte de garage Une dcision automatique La porte de garage est le plus grand objet mobile dune maison. Le rglage inappropri de la porte de garage et de louvre-porte peut entraner une force mortelle lorsque la porte ferme, ce qui pourrait faire en sorte quun enfant ou un adulte soit coinc et se solder par des blessures ou la mort. Linstallation, lutilisation, lentretien et les tests appropris de la porte de garage et de louvre-porte appropris sont ncessaires pour avoir un systme scuritaire et sans problme. Une utilisation imprudente ou permettre des enfants de jouer avec les commandes de louvre-porte ou de lutiliser sont galement des situations dangereuses qui peuvent mener des consquences tragiques. Quelques prcautions simples peuvent protger votre famille et vos amis de blessures possibles. Veuillez examiner les conseils de scurit et dentretien qui se trouvent dans le prsent guide et le garder pour consultation future. Vrifiez le fonctionnement de votre porte de garage et de votre ouvre-porte pour vous assurer quils fonctionnent de faon scuritaire et sans problme. Assurez-vous de lire toutes les donnes importantes sur la scurit qui se trouvent dans votre manuel douvre-porte, car elles contiennent davantage de dtails etdlments prendre en considration que ce qui peut tre fournis dans le prsent guide. Louvre-porte de garage nest pas un jouet. Parlez avec vos enfants de la scurit relative la porte de garage et louvre-porte. Expliquez les dangers de se retrouver coinc sous la porte. Tenez-vous loin dune porte en mouvement. Le bouton-poussoir install sur le mur doit tre hors de la dau moins 1,5mtre de la porte des enfants, une distance surface la plus proche sur laquelle on peut se tenir debout et loin de toutes les parties qui peuvent tre en mouvement. Installez et utilisez le bouton un endroit o vous pouvez clairement voir la porte de garage se fermer. Gardez les metteurs et les tlcommandes hors de la porte des enfants. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec les metteurs ou dautres tlcommandes ou les utiliser. Gardez la porte en vue jusqu ce quelle se ferme compltement lmetteur mural. lorsque vous utilisez le bouton-poussoir ou 43
1 2 | Confidentiality Letter Short Term FCC | Cover Letter(s) | 87.23 KiB | July 12 2022 |
May 17, 2022 To: Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Equipment Authorization Division 7345 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Short Term Confidentiality Request for FCC ID: HBW0458X2 To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47, and to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public, the applicant requests the following documents contained in this certification application be temporarily withheld from public disclosure for an initial period or 180 of 45 Date. See KDB 726920. not to exceed 180 days from the Grant days; or for a specified date of
e.g. User Manual e.g. Internal Photos e.g. Test Setup photos e.g. External Photos The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. Sincerely, Barbara Kelkhoff, Regulatory Engineering Manager The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Email: bkelkhoff@chamberlain.com
1 2 | Cover Letter Requesting Confidentiality | Cover Letter(s) | 84.54 KiB | July 12 2022 |
May 17, 2022 To:
Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD Subject: Permanent Confidentiality Request for FCC ID: HBW0458X2 Pursuant to sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47, we respectfully request permanent confidential treatment of the following Exhibits accompanying this application as:
- e.g. Block Diagram
- e.g. Schematics
- e.g. Operational Description The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, Barbara Kelkhoff, Regulatory Engineering Manager The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Email: bkelkhoff@chamberlain.com
1 2 | Declaration Letter model similarity | Cover Letter(s) | 96.67 KiB | July 12 2022 |
May 17, 2022 To Whom it may concern, We, The Chamberlain Group, Inc., hereby declare the following models, 91550MC, 91550RGDMC, 91640MC, 91640ACMC, 91650MC, 91650RGDMC, 93650-267MC, 93650RGD-
267, ATSWT, RC2202XMC, C2202XCMC, B2202XMC, B2202XC, C2405XMC, C2405XCMC,, D2405XCMC, B2405XMC, B2405XC,XMC, CMXEOCG322XMC, CMXEOCG472XMC, , ATSWXMC, B2401XMC have identical radio transmitters. The variation in model number is for marketing purposes. If you have any questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Barbara Kelkhoff, Regulatory Engineering Manager The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Email: bkelkhoff@chamberlain.com
1 2 | ETR2201780 test setup photos part 1 | Test Setup Photos | 550.93 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
1 2 | ETR2201780 test setup photos part 2 | Test Setup Photos | 542.50 KiB | July 12 2022 / January 01 2023 | delayed release |
1 2 | Phoenix AC Chamberlain Test Recommendatin 5-23-2022 (002) Data Map | Cover Letter(s) | 51.16 KiB | July 12 2022 |
Testing and Certification for REFERENCE (#4) Testing and Certification for Variant (#2) ReakTek WiFi FCC 15.247/RSS-247 15.207/RSS-247 Conducted RF emissions on AC Mains. Range: 150KHz-30MHz. Leads Tested: L1 & Neut Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Limits: 15.207/RSS-247 Modes: (2) Tx ON, Tx OFF NOTE: Performed during Simul-Tx & Digital Device 15.247/RSS-247 Measurements at Antenna Port Tests: 6dB BW, 99% BW, PSD, Cond Pwr, CSE Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (3) 802.11 b/g/n20 15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond
[RT WiFi]
15.247/RSS-247 Ant Port
[RT WiFi]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated) RT [WiFi]
Test Report RT [WiFi]
15.247/RSS-247 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-25GHz Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (3) 802.11 b/g/n20 ETR2201780-01 Realtek WiFi ReakTek BLE FCC 15.247/RSS-247 15.207/RSS-247 Conducted RF emissions on AC Mains. Range: 150KHz-30MHz. Leads Tested: L1 & Neut Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Limits: 15.207/RSS-247 Modes: (2) Tx ON, Tx OFF NOTE: Performed during Simul-Tx & Digital Device 15.247/RSS-247 Measurements at Antenna Port Tests: 6dB BW, 99% BW, PSD, Cond Pwr, CSE Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) BLE ONLY 15.247/RSS-247 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-25GHz Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) BLE ONLY ETR2201780-02 Realtek BLE Sub-1GHz 900MHz FHSS TX/RX FCC 15.247/RSS-247 15.207/RSS-247 Conducted RF emissions on AC Mains. Range: 150KHz-30MHz. Leads Tested: L1 & Neut Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Limits: 15.207/RSS-247 Modes: (2) Tx ON, Tx OFF NOTE: Performed during Simul-Tx & Digital Device 15.247/RSS-247 Measurements at Antenna Port Tests:20dB BW, 99% BW, Hopping, Cond Pwr, CSE Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) FHSS 15.247/RSS-247/15.109 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-10GHz Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) FHSS Tx 15.247 up to 10Ghz Modes: (1) FHSS Rx 15.109 up to 5GHz ETR2201780-03 900MHz TxRx Sub-1GHz 300/400MHz RX FCC 15.109/RSS-GEN 15.109/RSS-GEN Rad Spur EMI Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-2GHz Channels: (5) 310/315/390, 433.3, 434.5 Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) Rx at specified channel ETR2201780-04 300MHz Rx Security 3.0 BLE FCC 15.247/RSS-247 15.207/RSS-247 Conducted RF emissions on AC Mains. Range: 150KHz-30MHz. Leads Tested: L1 & Neut Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Limits: 15.207/RSS-247 Modes: (2) Tx ON, Tx OFF NOTE: Performed during Simul-Tx & Digital Device 15.247/RSS-247 Measurements at Antenna Port Tests: 6dB BW, 99% BW, PSD, Cond Pwr, CSE Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) BLE ONLY 15.247/RSS-247 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-25GHz Channels: (3) Low / Mid / High Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) BLE ONLY ETR2201780-05 Security BLE Simultaneous Multi-Tx Testing Digital Device EMC Testing 15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond
[RT BLE]
15.247/RSS-247 Ant Port
[RT BLE]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[RT BLE]
Test Report
[RT BLE]
15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
15.247/RSS-247 Ant Port
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
Test Report
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
15.109/RSS-GEN Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[300/400MHz Rx]
Test Report
[300/400MHz Rx]
15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond
[Sec-3.0 BLE]
15.247/RSS-247 Ant Port
[Sec-3.0 BLE]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[Sec-3.0 BLE]
Test Report
[Sec-3.0 BLE]
RealTek WiFi FCC 15.247/RSS-247 No testing, reference existing data No testing, reference existing data 15.247/RSS-247 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-25GHz Channels: (2) Low & High ONLY Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) 802.11 n20 ONLY (assumed worst-case) SPOT CHECK Tx Spurious Emissions upto 4th harmonic +3dB acceptance criteria. Reference existing data for other modes/channels ETR2201781-01 Realtek WiFi Spot Checks RealTek BLE FCC 15.247/RSS-247 No testing, reference existing data No testing, reference existing data 15.247/RSS-247 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-25GHz Channels: (2) Low & High ONLY Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) BLE ONLY SPOT CHECK Tx Spurious Emissions upto 4th harmonic +3dB acceptance criteria. Reference existing data for other modes/channels ETR2201781-02 Realtek BLE Spot Checks Sub-1GHz 900MHz FHSS TX/RX FCC 15.247/RSS-247 No testing, reference existing data No testing, reference existing data 15.247/RSS-247/15.109 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Prelim & final measurements: 30MHz-10GHz Channels: (2) Low & High ONLY Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) FHSS Tx 15.247 up to 10Ghz SPOT CHECK Tx Spurious Emissions upto 4th harmonic +3dB acceptance criteria. Modes: (1) FHSS Rx 15.109 up to 5GHz [NO TESTING]
NO SPOT CHECK TESTS ON FHSS Rx. Reference existing data for other modes/channels ETR2201781-02 FHSS Spot Checks Sub-1GHz 300/400MHz RX FCC 15.109/RSS-GEN 15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond
[RealTek WiFi]
15.247/RSS-247 Ant Port
[RealTek WiFi]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[RealTek WiFi]
Test Report RT [WiFi]
15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond
[RealTek BLE]
15.247/RSS-247 Ant Port
[RealTek BLE]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[RealTek BLE]
Test Report
[RealTek BLE]
15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
15.247/RSS-247 Ant Port
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
Test Report
[900MHz Tx/Rx]
15.109/RSS-GEN Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[300/400MHz Rx]
No testing, reference existing data Security 3.0 BLE FCC 15.247/RSS-247 No Testing, Radio is Depopulated
[Sec-3.0 BLE]
No Testing, Radio is Depopulated Simultaneous Multi-Tx Testing Digital Device EMC Testing 15.207/RSS-247/15.107 Cond RF EMI on AC Mains. Range: 150KHz-30MHz. Leads Tested: L1 & Neut Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Limits: 15.207/RSS-247 Modes: (1) All Tx ON, use for all CERT PL-CE Data [w/ 1 GDO type]
Modes: (1) All Tx OFF for Digital Device 15.109/ICES-003 [w/ 3 GDOs]
15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond NOTE: Digital Device Cond EMI testing per 15.109/ICES-003 performed on 3 GDO types having most full-featured configuration:
(1) Liftmaster Model [TBD]
(1) Raynor Model [TBD]
(1) Chamberlain Model [TBD]
15.207/RSS-247 RF Emi AC Mains PL Cond No testing, reference existing data NOTE: Digital Device Cond EMI testing per 15.109/ICES-003 performed on 3 GDO types having most full-featured configuration:
(1) Liftmaster Model [TBD]
(1) Raynor Model [TBD]
(1) Chamberlain Model [TBD]
15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[Multi-Tx]
[Dig Device]
No testing, reference existing data 15.247/RSS-247 Spur Emi
(Radiated)
[Multi-Tx]
[Dig Device]
Test Report
[Multi-Tx]
RE & CE Test Report
[Digital Device]
RE & CE 15.247/RSS-247/15.109 Rad Spur EMI, BEC & EIRP Test: Preliminary & final measurements: 30MHz-25GHz Power: 120VAC, 60Hz. Modes: (1) RT-WiFi/Sec3.0 BLE/FHSS [w/ 1 GDO type]
Modes: (1) RT-BLE/FHSS [w/ 1 GDO type]
Modes: (1) All Tx OFF, Limits 15.109 & ICES-003 [w/ 3 GDOs]
ETR2201780-06 MultiTx Included in the following reports ETR2201780-01, -02, -03, -04 USA & Canada Certifications
(1) 15.247 Cert for RT WiFi, RT BLE, Sec 3.0 BLE
(1) 15.247 Cert for 900MHz FHSS FCC ID: HBW0458X2 for all FCC Certs Board Variants: 003-0458-4, 003-0458-5
(1) RSS-247 Cert for RT WiFi, RT BLE, Sec 3.0 BLE
(1) RSS-247 Cert for 900MHz FHSS FCC Certification FCC Certification ISED Canada Certification IC ID: 2666A-0458X2 Board Variants: 003-0458-4, 003-0458-5 ISED Canada Certification IC ID: 2666A-0454X1 for all CAN Certs Board Variants: 003-0458-2, 003-0458-3 USA & Canada Certifications
(1) 15.247 Cert RT WiFi & RT BLE
(1) 15.247 Cert for 900MHz FHSS FCC ID: HBW0454X1 for all FCC Certs Board Variants: 003-0458-2, 003-0458-3
(1) RSS-247 Cert RT WiFi & RT BLE
(1) RSS-247 Cert for 900MHz FHSS
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2022-07-12 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
2 | 902.25 ~ 926.75 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2022-07-12
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Chamberlain Group Inc, The
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0004301545
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
300 Windsor Dr
|
||||
1 2 |
Oak Brook, IL
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
r******@elitetest.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
HBW
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
0458X2
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
B******** K******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Regulatory Engineering Manager
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
630 9********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
630 5********
|
||||
1 2 |
b******@chamberlain.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Thee Chamberlain Group Inc.
|
||||
1 2 |
The Chamberlain Group, Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
A****** P****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
300 Windsor Drive
|
||||
1 2 |
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
63051********
|
||||
1 2 |
A******@Chamberlain.com
|
|||||
1 2 |
A******@chamberlain.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 01/01/2023 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | MyQ - Garage Door Opener | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power Output is Conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Grantee must provide installation and operating instructions for complying with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures and RF Exposure compliance. | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Elite Electronic Engineering Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
K****** H********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
630-4******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
630-4********
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@elitetest.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.194 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0014 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0107 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 902.25000000 | 926.75000000 | 0.0710000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC